- Computers & electronics
- Audio & home theatre
- Home cinema systems
- Sony
- DAV-SR1W
- Operating instructions
advertisement
▼
Scroll to page 2
of 228
2-108-849-11(2) DVD Home Theatre System Operating Instructions GB CT DAV-SR1W ©2004 Sony Corporation 3 WARNING To prevent fire or shock hazard, do not expose the unit to rain or moisture. Do not install the appliance in a confined space, such as a bookcase or built-in cabinet. To prevent fire, do not cover the ventilation of the apparatus with news papers, table-cloths, curtains, etc. And don’t place lighted candles on the apparatus. To prevent fire or shock hazard, do not place objects filled with liquids, such as vases, on the apparatus. Don’t throw away the battery with general house waste, dispose of it correctly as chemical waste. This appliance is classified as a CLASS 1 LASER product. The label is located on the bottom of the unit. Precautions Safety • If anything falls into the cabinet, unplug the unit and have it checked by qualified personnel before operating it any further. • The unit is not disconnected from the AC power source (mains) as long as it is connected to the wall outlet (mains), even if the unit itself has been turned off. • Unplug the unit from the wall outlet if you do not intend to use it for an extended period of time. To disconnect the cord, pull it out by the plug, never by the cord. Installing • Allow adequate air circulation to prevent internal heat buildup. • Do not place the unit on surfaces (rugs, blankets, etc.) or near materials (curtains, draperies) that may block the ventilation slots. • Do not install the unit near heat sources such as radiators, or air ducts, or in a place subject to direct sunlight, excessive dust, mechanical vibration, or shock. • Do not install the unit in an inclined position. It is designed to be operated in a horizontal position only. • Keep the unit and discs away from equipment with strong magnets, such as microwave ovens, or large loudspeakers. • Do not place heavy objects on the unit. 2GB • If the unit is brought directly from a cold to a warm location, moisture may condense inside the DVD Home Theatre System and cause damage to the lenses. When you first install the unit, or when you move it from a cold to a warm location, wait for about 30 minutes before operating the unit. Welcome! Thank you for purchasing Sony DVD Home Theatre System. Before operating this system, please read this manual thoroughly and retain it for future reference. Precautions On power sources AC power cord must be changed only at the qualified service shop. On placement • Place the system in a location with adequate ventilation to prevent heat build-up in the system. • At high volume, over long periods of time, the cabinet becomes hot to the touch. This is not a malfunction. However, touching the cabinet should be avoided. Do not place the unit in a confined space where ventilation is poor as this may cause overheating. • Do not block the cooling fan or ventilation slots by putting anything on the system. Also, do not place the system on a soft surface such as a rug that might block the ventilation holes on the bottom. The system is equipped with a high power amplifier. If the cooling fan or ventilation slots are blocked, the unit can overheat and malfunction. • Do not place the system in a location near heat sources, or in a place subject to direct sunlight, excessive dust, or mechanical shock. On operation • If the system is brought directly from a cold to a warm location, or is placed in a very damp room, moisture may condense on the lenses inside the system. Should this occur, the system may not operate properly. In this case, remove the disc and leave the system turned on for about half an hour until the moisture evaporates. • When you move the system, take out any disc. If you don’t, the disc may be damaged. • For power saving purposes, set the system to standby mode by pressing the "/1 button (the STANDBY indicator lights up). To turn off the system completely, remove the AC power cord (mains lead) from the wall outlet (mains). On adjusting volume Do not turn up the volume while listening to a section with very low level inputs or no audio signals. If you do, the speakers may be damaged when a peak level section is suddenly played. On cleaning Clean the cabinet, panel, and controls with a soft cloth slightly moistened with a mild detergent solution. Do not use any type of abrasive pad, scouring powder or solvent such as alcohol or benzine. If you have any questions or problems concerning your system, please consult your nearest Sony dealer. On cleaning discs Do not use a commercially available CD/DVD cleaning disc. It may cause a malfunction. On your TV’s color If the speakers should cause the TV screen to have color irregularity, turn off the TV at once then turn it on after 15 to 30 minutes. If color irregularity should persist, place the speakers farther away from the set. The nameplate is located on the bottom exterior of the unit. IMPORTANT NOTICE Caution: This system is capable of holding a still video image or on-screen display image on your television screen indefinitely. If you leave the still video image or on-screen display image displayed on your TV for an extended period of time you risk permanent damage to your television screen. Projection televisions are especially susceptible to this. On moving the system When you carry the system, use the following procedure to protect the inner mechanism. 1 Make sure that a disc is removed from the system. 2 Press FUNCTION repeatedly to select “DVD.” 3 Press ., >, and Z simultaneously. The front panel display is changed to “MECHA LOCK.” To cancel, press "/1. 4 Remove the AC power cord (mains lead) from the wall outlet (mains). 3GB Table of Contents Welcome!................................................3 Precautions.............................................. 3 About This Manual ................................. 6 This System Can Play the Following Discs ................................................. 6 Terms for Discs....................................... 6 Notes about Discs ................................... 8 Guide to the Control Menu Display........9 Getting Started Unpacking ............................................. 11 Inserting Batteries into the Remote....... 11 Step 1: Speaker System Hookup........... 12 Step 2: Antenna (aerial) Hookups......... 23 Step 3: TV and Video Component Hookups.......................................... 25 Step 4: Connecting the AC Power Cords (Mains Leads) ................................. 29 Step 5: Adjusting the Wireless System ............................................ 29 Step 6: Performing the Quick Setup ..... 34 Speaker Setup........................................ 36 Playing Discs Playing Discs ........................................ 37 Resuming Playback from the Point Where You Stopped the Disc ..................... 39 (Resume Play) Using the DVD’s Menu ........................ 40 Playing VIDEO CDs with PBC Functions (Ver. 2.0)......................................... 40 (PBC Playback) Playing an MP3 Audio Track ............... 41 Playing JPEG Image Files .................... 43 Creating Your Own Program ................ 45 (Program Play) Playing in Random Order ..................... 47 (Shuffle Play) Playing Repeatedly ............................... 48 (Repeat Play) Searching for a Particular Point on a Disc .............................................. 49 (Scan, Slow-motion Play) Searching for a Title/Chapter/Track/ Index/Album/File............................ 50 4GB Viewing Disc Information .................... 52 Sound Adjustments Changing the Sound ............................. 56 Enjoying Surround Sound .................... 58 Selecting the Surround Back Decoding Mode............................................... 62 Using the Sound Effect......................... 64 Using Various Additional Functions Changing the Angles ............................ 65 Displaying Subtitles.............................. 66 Locking Discs ....................................... 67 (CUSTOM PARENTAL CONTROL, PARENTAL CONTROL) Other Operations Controlling TV with the Supplied Remote ........................................... 72 Using the SONY TV DIRECT Function.......................................... 74 Using the Video or Other Units............ 76 Enjoying Multiplex Broadcast Sound (DUAL MONO)............................. 76 Enjoying the Radio ............................... 77 Using the Sleep Timer .......................... 80 Changing the Brightness of the Front Panel Display.................................. 81 Returning to the Default Settings ......... 81 Settings and Adjustments Using the Setup Display........................ 82 Setting the Display or Sound Track Language ........................................ 83 (LANGUAGE SETUP) Settings for the Display......................... 83 (SCREEN SETUP) Custom Settings .................................... 85 (CUSTOM SETUP) Settings for the Speakers.......................87 (SPEAKER SETUP) Quick Setup and Resetting the System....................................... 92 (SETUP) Additional Information Troubleshooting .................................... 93 Specifications ........................................ 96 Glossary ................................................98 Index to Parts and Controls.................102 Language Code List ............................108 DVD Setup Menu List ........................ 109 AMP Menu List .................................. 111 Index ................................................... 112 Quick Reference for Remote Commander .................................. 114 5GB About This Manual • The instructions in this manual describe the controls on the remote. You can also use the controls on the system if they have the same or similar names as those on the remote. • The following symbols are used in this manual. Symbol Meaning Functions available in VIDEO CD mode Functions available in CD mode Functions available in Super Audio CD and Audio CD mode Functions available for MP3* audio tracks Functions available for JPEG files * MP3 (MPEG1 Audio Layer 3) is a standard format defined by ISO/MPEG which compresses audio data. This System Can Play the Following Discs DVD VIDEO Super Audio CD VIDEO CD Audio CD 6GB Disc logo CD-R/CD-RW (audio data) (MP3 files) (JPEG files) The “DVD VIDEO” logo is a trademark. Functions available for DVD VIDEOs, DVD-Rs/DVD-RWs in video mode, and DVD+Rs/ DVD+RWs Format of discs Format of discs Disc logo Terms for Discs • Title The longest section of a picture or music feature on a DVD, movie, etc., in video software, or the entire album in audio software. • Chapter Section of a picture or a music piece that is smaller than titles. A title is composed of several chapters. Depending on the disc, no chapters may be recorded. • Album Section of a music piece or an image on a data CD containing MP3 audio tracks or JPEG files. • Track Section of a picture or a music piece on a VIDEO CD, Super Audio CD, CD, or MP3. • Index (Super Audio CD, CD) / Video Index (VIDEO CD) A number that divides a track into sections to easily locate the point you want on a VIDEO CD, Super Audio CD, or CD. Depending on the disc, no indexes may be recorded. • Scene On a VIDEO CD with PBC functions (page 40), the menu screens, moving pictures and still pictures are divided into sections called “scenes.” • File Section of a picture on a data CD containing JPEG image files. DVD structure Disc Region code Disc Your system has a region code printed on the back of the unit and will only play DVDs labeled with the same region code. Title Chapter VIDEO CD, Super Audio CD, or CD structure Track Index Disc MP3 structure Album Track Disc JPEG structure DVDs labeled ALL will also play on this system. If you try to play any other DVD, the message [Playback prohibited by area limitations.] will appear on the TV screen. Depending on the DVD, no region code indication may be given even though playing the DVD is prohibited by area restrictions. Album File Note on PBC (Playback Control) (VIDEO CDs) This system conforms to Ver. 1.1 and Ver. 2.0 of VIDEO CD standards. You can enjoy two kinds of playback depending on the disc type. Disc type You can VIDEO CDs without PBC functions (Ver. 1.1 discs) Enjoy video playback (moving pictures) as well as music. VIDEO CDs with PBC functions (Ver. 2.0 discs) Play interactive software using menu screens displayed on the TV screen (PBC Playback), in addition to the video playback functions of Ver. 1.1 discs. Moreover, you can play highresolution still pictures, if they are included on the disc. About Multi Session CD • This system can play Multi Session CDs when an MP3 audio track is contained in the first session. Any subsequent MP3 audio tracks recorded in later sessions can also be played back. • This system can play Multi Session CDs when a JPEG image file is contained in the first session. Any subsequent JPEG image files recorded in later sessions can also be played back. • If audio tracks and images in music CD format or video CD format are recorded in the first session, only the first session will be played back. Examples of discs that the system cannot play The system cannot play the following discs: • CD-ROMs (except for extension “.MP3,” “.JPG,” or “.JPEG”) • CD-Rs/CD-RWs other than those recorded in the following formats: – audio CD format – video CD format – MP3/JPEG format that conforms to ISO9660* Level 1/Level 2, or its extended format, Joliet • Data part of CD-Extras • DVD-ROMs • DVD Audio discs • DVD-RAMs • DVD-RWs in VR (Video Recording) mode • Progressive JPEG file * A logical format of files and folders on CD-ROMs, defined by ISO (International Organization for standardization) Do not load the following discs: • A DVD with a different region code (page 7, 100). • A disc that is neither standard nor circular (e.g., card, heart, or star shape). • A disc with paper or stickers on it. • A disc that has adhesive or cellophane tape still left on it. continued 7GB Notes about CD-R/CD-RW/DVD-R/DVD-RW (Video mode)/DVD+R/DVD+RW In some cases, CD-R/CD-RW/DVD-R/DVD-RW (Video mode)/DVD+R/DVD+RW cannot be played on this player due to the recording quality or physical condition of the disc, or the characteristics of the recording device and authoring software. The disc will not play if it has not been correctly finalized. For more information, see the operating instructions for the recording device. Note that discs created in the Packet Write format cannot be played. Music discs encoded with copyright protection technologies * Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. “Dolby”, “Pro Logic”, and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. ** Manufactured under license from Digital Theater Systems, Inc. “DTS”, “DTS-ES”, “Neo:6”, and “DTS Digital Surround” are trademarks of Digital Theater Systems, Inc. Notes about Discs On handling discs This product is designed to play back discs that conform to the Compact Disc (CD) standard. Recently, various music discs encoded with copyright protection technologies are marketed by some record companies. Please be aware that among those discs, there are some that do not conform to the CD standard and may not be playable by this product. • To keep the disc clean, handle the disc by its edge. Do not touch the surface. • Do not stick paper or tape on the disc. Note on playback operations of DVDs and VIDEO CDs • Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight or heat sources such as hot air ducts, or leave it in a car parked in direct sunlight as the temperature may rise considerably inside the car. • After playing, store the disc in its case. Some playback operations of DVDs and VIDEO CDs may be intentionally set by software producers. Since this system plays DVDs and VIDEO CDs according to the disc contents the software producers designed, some playback features may not be available. Also, refer to the instructions supplied with the DVDs or VIDEO CDs. On cleaning • Before playing, clean the disc with a cleaning cloth. Wipe the disc from the center out. Copyrights This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights. Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by Macrovision, and is intended for home and other limited viewing uses only unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision. Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited. This system incorporates with Dolby* Digital and Dolby Pro Logic (II) adaptive matrix surround decoder and the DTS** Digital Surround System. 8GB • Do not use solvents such as benzine, thinner, commercially available cleaners, or anti-static spray intended for vinyl LPs. This system can only play back a standard circular disc. Using neither standard nor circular discs (e.g., card, heart, or star shape) may cause a malfunction. Do not use a disc that has a commercially available accessory attached, such as a label or ring. Guide to the Control Menu Display Use the Control Menu to select a function that you would like to use. The Control Menu display appears when the DVD DISPLAY button is pressed. For details, refer to the page in parentheses. Total number of titles or tracks recorded Total number of chapters or indexes recorded Currently playing Playback status Disc name or title name (NPlayback, XPause, xStop, etc.) disc type Currently playing title number (VIDEO CD/Super Audio CD/CD: track number) Currently playing chapter number (VIDEO CD/Super Audio CD/CD: index number) DVD 1 2 ( 2 7 ) TITLE 12 18(34) Playing time T Icon of selected Control Menu item DVD Type of disc being played back 1:32:55 1: ENGLISH 2: FRENCH 3: SPANISH Current setting Options Control Menu items Function name of selected Control Menu item SUBTITLE Select: ENTER Operation message List of Control Menu Items DISC Displays the disc name or the disc type inserted into the system. TITLE (DVD only) (page 50)/ Selects the title (DVD), or the track (VIDEO CD) to be played. Displays the scene (VIDEO CD in PBC playback). SCENE (only VIDEO CD in PBC playback) / TRACK (VIDEO CD only) (page 50) CHAPTER (DVD only) (page 51)/ Selects the chapter (DVD) or the index (VIDEO CD) to be played. INDEX (VIDEO CD only) (page 51) ALBUM (MP3 only) (page 42, 50) Selects the album (MP3) to be played. TRACK (Super Audio CD/CD/ Selects the track (Super Audio CD/CD/MP3) to be played. MP3 only) (page 42, 50) INDEX (Super Audio CD/CD only) Displays the index and selects the index (Super Audio CD) to be played. (page 51) TIME (page 51) Checks the elapsed time and the remaining playback time. Inputs the time code for picture and music searching. AUDIO (DVD/VIDEO CD/Super Changes the audio setting. Audio CD/CD/MP3 only) (page 56) SUBTITLE (DVD only) (page 66) Displays the subtitles. Changes the subtitle language. ALBUM (JPEG only) (page 43) Selects the album (JPEG) to be played. continued 9GB FILE (JPEG only) (page 43) Selects the file (JPEG) to be played. DATE (JPEG only) (page 55) Displays the date information. ANGLE (DVD only) (page 65) Changes the angle. PLAYMODE (VIDEO CD/Super Selects the play mode. Audio CD/CD/MP3/JPEG only) (page 47) REPEAT (page 48) Plays the entire disc (all titles/all tracks), one title/chapter/ track/album, or contents of program repeatedly. CUSTOM PARENTAL Sets the disc to prohibit playing. CONTROL (page 67) Tips • Each time you press DVD DISPLAY, the Control Menu display changes as follows: Control Menu display m Control Menu display off The Control Menu items vary, depending on the disc. • The Control Menu icon indicator lights up in green t unless you set the [REPEAT] setting to [OFF]. • The [ANGLE] indicator lights up in green only when multiple angles are recorded on the disc. 10GB Getting Started Check that you have the following items: • Speakers (5) • Subwoofer (1) • Surround amplifier (1) • Mounting plate (1) • Coupling plate for the surround speaker (2) • Coupling screw (4) • IR transmittera) (1) • IR receivera)b) (1) • IR receiver standb) (1) • AM loop antenna (aerial) (1) • FM wire antenna (aerial) (1) • Speaker cords (3.5m × 3, 5m × 2, 7cm × 2) • Video cord (1) • Remote Commander (remote) RM-SP320 (1) • Size AAA (R03) batteries (2) • Operating Instructions • Speakers - Connection and Installation (card) (1) You can control the system using the supplied remote. Insert two size AAA (R03) batteries by matching the 3 and # ends on the batteries to the markings inside the compartment. When using the remote, point it at the remote sensor on the system. Getting Started Unpacking Inserting Batteries into the Remote Remove the cover. a) The cords of the IR transmitter and IR receiver are for this system only. You cannot use a commercially available extension cord. b) Used when the IR receiver of the surround amplifier cannot receive infrared ray because of the position. For details, see “Using the IR receiver” (page 30). Notes • Do not leave the remote in an extremely hot or humid place. • Do not use a new battery with an old one. • Do not drop any foreign object into the remote casing, particularly when replacing the batteries. • Do not expose the remote sensor to direct light from the sun or lighting apparatus. Doing so may cause a malfunction. • If you do not use the remote for an extended period of time, remove the batteries to avoid possible damage from battery leakage and corrosion. 11GB Step 1: Speaker System Hookup Connect the supplied speaker system using the supplied speaker cords by matching the colors of the jacks to those of the cords. Do not connect any speakers other than those supplied with this system. To obtain the best possible surround sound, specify the speaker parameters (distance, level, etc.) on page 36. Required cords Speaker cords The connector and the color tube of the speaker cords are the same color as the label of the jacks to be connected. (–) (–) (+) (+) color tube Required equipments for the wireless system IR transmitter Transmits the sound by the infrared ray. Connect it to the system. Surround amplifier The surround amplifier incorporates the IR receiver. It receives the sound from the IR transmitter and sends it to the surround speakers. IR receiver POWER/ON LINE You can combine the surround amplifier and the surround speakers, which keeps the cords and the system tidy (page 14). 12GB IR receiver Getting Started Used when the IR receiver of the surround amplifier cannot receive infrared ray because of the position. Connect to the surround amplifier. For details, see “Using the IR receiver” (page 30). When using the IR receiver stand, attach the stand so that both delta marks on the IR receiver and stand are aligned. IR receiver Delta marks IR receiver stand Note When you connect the IR receiver to the surround amplifier, the IR receiver is activated and the IR receiver of the surround amplifier is not activated automatically. continued 13GB To assemble the surround amplifier and the surround speakers 1 Engage the studs of the surround amplifier in the keyholes of the surround speaker (L), then move the surround speaker (L) forward. “SURR L” mark is on the surface of the surround speaker (L). Surround speaker (L) Surround amplifier "SURR L" mark Keyholes 2 m Studs Connect the speaker cord. The speaker cord (7 cm) should match the color of the jacks. Rear of the surround amplifier Rear of the surround speaker (L) SURROUND L SPEAKER SPEAKER SURROUND R DIR-R2 14GB 3 Secure the coupling plate for the surround speaker using the coupling screws. Getting Started Coupling plate for the surround speaker Coupling screws Note that the speaker cord should not be pushed out of the coupling plate. 4 Attach the surround speaker (R). Follow the same procedure for the surround speaker (L). (See the steps from 1 to 3.) Complete image continued 15GB To detach the surround speakers from the surround amplifier 1 Remove the coupling screws, then remove the coupling plate for the surround speaker. Coupling screws Coupling plate for the surround speaker 2 3 Remove the speaker cord. Pull the surround speaker backwards to remove. , 16GB Terminals for connecting the speakers Connect the Getting Started When using the speakers attached to the surround amplifier To the Front speakers SPEAKER FRONT L (white) and R (red) jacks of the system Center speaker SPEAKER CENTER (green) jack of the system Subwoofer SPEAKER WOOFER (purple) jacks of the system IR transmitter DIR-T1 (pink) jack of the system Front speaker (L) Front speaker (R) Center speaker VIDEO SPEAKER FRONT R CENTER R AUDIO IN SURROUND R BACK AUDIO IN FRONT L Y PB/CB S VIDEO (DVD ONLY) PR/CR L DIR-T1 WOOFER WOOFER Subwoofer COMPOMEMT VIDEO OUT L SAT VIDEO MONITOR OUT IR transmitter IR receiver Use when you do not use the IR receiver of the surround amplifier (page 30). Surround speaker (R) Surround speaker (L) SURROUND L SPEAKER SPEAKER SURROUND R DIR-R2 continued 17GB When using the speakers and surround amplifier separately Connect the To the Front speakers SPEAKER FRONT L (white) and R (red) jacks of the system Center speaker SPEAKER CENTER (green) jack of the system Subwoofer SPEAKER WOOFER (purple) jacks of the system Surround speakers SPEAKER SURROUND L (blue) and R (gray) jacks of the surround amplifier IR transmitter DIR-T1 (pink) jack of the system Front speaker (R) Front speaker (L) Center speaker VIDEO SPEAKER FRONT R CENTER FRONT L R AUDIO IN SURROUND R BACK AUDIO IN Y PB/CB S VIDEO (DVD ONLY) PR/CR L DIR-T1 WOOFER WOOFER Subwoofer COMPOMEMT VIDEO OUT L SAT VIDEO MONITOR OUT IR transmitter IR receiver Use when you do not use the IR receiver of the surround amplifier (page 30). Surround speaker (L) 18GB SURROUND L SPEAKER SPEAKER SURROUND R DIR-R2 Surround speaker (R) Notes on placing speakers Getting Started • Do not set the speakers in an inclined position. • Do not place the speakers in locations that are: – Extremely hot or cold – Dusty or dirty – Very humid – Subject to vibrations – Subject to direct sunlight • Use caution when placing the subwoofer or tall speakers on a specially treated (waxed, oiled, polished, etc.) floor, as staining or discoloration may result. Notes on placing IR transmitter and surround amplifier (or IR receiver) • Do not install the surround amplifier (or IR receiver) in a place exposed to direct sunlight, or strong light such as an incandescent lamp. • The cords of the IR transmitter and IR receiver are for this system only. You cannot use a commercially available extension cord. Note Do not catch the speaker cable insulation in the SPEAKER jack. Tip Connect the speaker cable after bending the speaker wire at the end of the insulation. This prevents the speaker cable from being caught in the SPEAKER jack. continued 19GB To connect the surround back speaker This system is compatible with the 6.1 surround system. When you enjoy a DVD that is compatible with the 6.1 surround system such as a DTS-ES disc, connect the surround back speaker (not supplied) and set its parameters (see “Settings for the Speakers” on page 87). VIDEO SPEAKER FRONT R CENTER R FRONT L AUDIO IN Y PB/CB S VIDEO (DVD ONLY) PR/CR L OPTICAL DIGITAL IN AM FM 75 COAXIAL DIR-T1 SURROUND R BACK WOOFER WOOFER COMPOMEMT VIDEO OUT AUDIO IN SAT L VIDEO SAT MONITOR OUT Amplifier AUDIO IN Surround back speaker Tip You can also enjoy the 6.1 surround sound when you play a 2 or 5.1 channel source by using the surround back decoding function (see “Selecting the Surround Back Decoding Mode” on page 62). To avoid short-circuiting the speakers Short-circuiting of the speakers may damage the system. To prevent this, be sure to follow these precautions when connecting the speakers. Make sure the bare wire of each speaker cord does not touch another speaker jack or the bare wire of another speaker cord. Examples of poor conditions of the speaker cord Stripped speaker cord is touching another speaker terminal. Stripped cords are touching each other due to excessive removal of insulation. After connecting all the components, speakers, and AC power cord (mains lead), output a test tone to check that all the speakers are connected correctly. For details on outputting a test tone, see page 89. If no sound is heard from a speaker while outputting a test tone, or a test tone is output from a speaker other than the one currently displayed in the front panel display, the speaker may be short-circuited. If this happens, check the speaker connection again. Notes • Be sure to match the speaker cord to the appropriate terminal on the components: 3 to 3, and # to #. If the cords are reversed, the sound will lack bass and may be distorted. • If you connect the speaker cord incorrectly or turn up the volume in a state of a short circuit, “PROTECT” appears in the front panel display and the system enters standby mode. In this case, disconnect and then reconnect the AC power cord (mains lead) from the wall outlet (mains), and then turn the system on. 20GB To change the speaker cables Detaching Getting Started If you want to use a different speaker cable, you can detach the plug for attachment to another cable. Catcher With the catcher facing down, press and hold the plug down against a flat surface and remove the cords from plug. Attaching While pressing the plug down against a flat surface, insert the new speaker cords. Note that the cord marked with a line should be attached to the minus (-) side of the plug. Notes • Be careful not to damage the surface you use (desk, etc.) when attaching/detaching the speaker cords. • When using the subwoofer cord, note that the two outside black cords or the cords marked with letters are negative. (–) (–) (+) (+) (–) (–) • If you connect the subwoofer cord incorrectly or turn up the volume in a state of a short circuit, “PROTECT” appears in the front panel display and the system enters standby mode. In this case, disconnect and then reconnect the AC power cord (mains lead) from the wall outlet (mains), and then turn the system on. Tips • You can use any commercially sold speaker cable of gauge cord AWG #18 - AWG #22. • Before attaching a new cable, strip off 10 mm of its insulation and twist the bare wires of both cords. 10 mm continued 21GB About the wireless system This wireless system adopts the Digital Infrared Audio Transmission system (page 98). The following diagram indicates the infrared transmission area (the range that the infrared rays can reach). When using the IR receiver of the surround amplifier Top view Side view Infrared signal Infrared signal 10 10 10 10 IR transmitter Approx. 10m IR receiver Surround amplifier IR transmitter Approx. 10m IR receiver Surround amplifier When using the IR receiver Top view Side view Infrared signal Infrared signal 10 10 10 10 IR transmitter Approx. 10m IR receiver IR transmitter Approx. 10m IR receiver Notes • Do not install the surround amplifier (or IR receiver) in a place exposed to direct sunlight, or strong light such as an incandescent lamp. • Do not use the surround amplifier (or IR receiver) that is not supplied with the system. 22GB Step 2: Antenna (aerial) Hookups Getting Started Connect the supplied AM/FM antennas (aerials) for listening to the radio. Terminals for connecting the antennas (aerials) Connect the To the AM loop antenna (aerial) AM terminals FM wire antenna (aerial) FM 75Ω COAXIAL jack AM loop antenna (aerial) VIDEO SPEAKER FRONT R CENTER R FRONT L AUDIO IN Y PB/CB PR/CR L S VIDEO (DVD ONLY) OPTICAL DIGITAL IN AM FM 75 COAXIAL DIR-T1 SURROUND R BACK WOOFER COMPOMEMT VIDEO OUT AUDIO IN SAT WOOFER SAT L VIDEO MONITOR OUT FM wire antenna (aerial) Notes • To prevent noise pickup, keep the AM loop antenna (aerial) away from the system and other components. • Be sure to fully extend the FM wire antenna (aerial). • After connecting the FM wire antenna (aerial), keep it as horizontal as possible. Tip When you connect the supplied AM loop antenna (aerial), the cord (A) and the cord (B) can be connected in either terminal. AM A B continued 23GB Tip If you have poor FM reception, use a 75-ohms coaxial cable (not supplied) to connect the system to an outdoor FM antenna (aerial) as shown below. Outdoor FM antenna (aerial) AM System 24GB FM 75 COAXIAL Step 3: TV and Video Component Hookups Getting Started Required cords Video cord for connecting a TV Yellow Audio cords (not supplied) When connecting a cord, be sure to match the color-coded sleeves to the appropriate jacks on the components. White (L/audio) Red (R/audio) Terminals for connecting video components Connect the To the TV (VIDEO IN) MONITOR OUT (VIDEO) jack VCR (AUDIO OUT) VIDEO (AUDIO IN) jacks Digital satellite receiver (AUDIO OUT) SAT (AUDIO IN) jacks Notes • The video signal is output as below: – When [COMPONENT OUT] is set to [INTERLACE] in [SCREEN SETUP] (page 84) (default) The video signal is output from the S VIDEO and VIDEO jacks of MONITOR OUT. – When [COMPONENT OUT] is set to [PROGRESSIVE] in [SCREEN SETUP] (page 84) The video signal is output from the COMPONENT VIDEO OUT jacks only. • When you connect a VCR or digital satellite receiver to the VIDEO/SAT jacks of this system, change the function to VIDEO or SAT (page 76). Tips • When using the S video jack instead of the video jacks, your TV monitor must also be connected via an S video jack. S video signals are on a separate bus from the video signals and will not be output through the video jacks. • When using the COMPONENT VIDEO OUT jacks (Y, PB/CB, PR/CR) instead of the video jacks, your TV monitor must also be connected via COMPONENT VIDEO OUT jacks (Y, PB/CB, PR/CR). If your TV accepts progressive format signals, you must use this connection and set [COMPONENT OUT] to [PROGRESSIVE] in [SCREEN SETUP] (page 84). continued 25GB TV with COMPONENT VIDEO IN jacks VCR AUDIO OUT Y L PB/CB R PR/CR IN OUT VIDEO SPEAKER FRONT R CENTER R FRONT L AUDIO IN Y PB/CB PR/CR L OPTICAL DIGITAL IN S VIDEO (DVD ONLY) AM FM 75 COAXIAL DIR-T1 SURROUND R BACK WOOFER AUDIO OUT OPTICAL DIGITAL OUT AUDIO IN SAT WOOFER OUT OUT COMPOMEMT VIDEO OUT SAT L VIDEO MONITOR OUT IN IN S VIDEO IN VIDEO IN L R Digital satellite receiver or PlayStation 2 etc. TV TV with S VIDEO IN jack Notes • Make connections securely to prevent unwanted noise. • Refer to the instructions supplied with the TV. • The system cannot output an audio signal to the connected TV. Only the audio signal of the TV is output from the system speakers. If you connect a digital satellite receiver with an OPTICAL OUT jack The digital satellite receiver can be connected to the SAT OPTICAL DIGITAL IN jack instead of the SAT AUDIO IN (L/R) jacks of the system. The system can accept both the digital and analogue signals. Digital signals have priority over analogue signals. If the digital signal ceases, the analogue signal will be processed after 2 seconds. If you connect a digital satellite receiver without an OPTICAL OUT jack Connect the digital satellite receiver to the SAT AUDIO IN (L/R) jacks only of the system. To listen to the game machine (e.g., PlayStation 2) sound by using the system Connect the audio output jacks of the game machine to the SAT AUDIO IN (L/R) jacks of the system with the audio cords (not supplied). 26GB To change the color system (PAL or NTSC)* Depending on the TV to be connected, you may be required to select either PAL or NTSC of the system. The initial setting of the system for Australian and Saudi Arabian models is PAL. The initial setting of the system for Asian models is NTSC. If the color system of the TV is PAL Getting Started * Asian, Australian, and Saudi Arabian models only. To set the system to PAL from NTSC, turn on the system by pressing "/1 on the remote while pressing . on the system. You need to hold . until the set powers on. To reset to NTSC, turn off the system and then turn on again by pressing "/1 on the remote while pressing and holding . on the system. If the color system of the TV is NTSC Do the same operation above to set the system to NTSC from PAL. When connecting to a standard 4:3 screen TV Depending on the disc, the image may not fit your TV screen. If you want to change the aspect ratio, please refer to page 83. Does your TV accept progressive signals? Progressive is the method for displaying TV images which reduces flickering, and sharpens the image. To display using this method, you need to connect to a TV that accepts progressive signals and set the output signal of COMPONENT VIDEO OUT to the progressive format. For details, see “To set to [PROGRESSIVE]” on page 84. If your TV does not accept progressive signals and progressive format is set by mistake The image may not appear, or will appear distorted. In this case, return the setting to interlace format. . FUNCTION 1 2 Press FUNCTION repeatedly until “DVD” appears in the front panel display. While holding down ., press FUNCTION. The output signal is changed to interlace format. continued 27GB Output the TV or VCR sound from the speakers 1 Connect audio cords. Connect the AUDIO OUT (L/R) jacks of TV or VCR to the VIDEO jacks (AUDIO IN L/R) of this system with audio cords. TV or VCR * AUDIO OUT L R VIDEO SPEAKER FRONT R CENTER R FRONT L AUDIO IN Y PB/CB PR/CR L S VIDEO (DVD ONLY) OPTICAL DIGITAL IN AM FM 75 COAXIAL DIR-T1 SURROUND R BACK WOOFER WOOFER COMPOMEMT VIDEO OUT AUDIO IN SAT L SAT VIDEO MONITOR OUT * AUDIO OUT (L/R) jacks If your TV does not have AUDIO OUT (L/R) jacks, you cannot output the TV sound from the speakers of this system. 2 Change the mode of this system. Press FUNCTION repeatedly to select “VIDEO.” Note Be sure to make the connections securely to avoid hum and noise. If using the VIDEO jack distorts the sound, reconnect the TV or VCR to SAT. Tip When you want to output the TV sound or stereo sound of a 2 channel source from the 6 speakers, select any sound field other than “AUTO FORMAT DIRECT AUTO” or “2 CHANNEL STEREO” (page 58). 28GB Step 4: Connecting the AC Power Cords (Mains Leads) Step 5: Adjusting the Wireless System After connecting the speakers, IR transmitter, and the AC power cords (mains leads), adjust the wireless system for good transmission. "/1 POWER IR receiver POWER/ON LINE Getting Started Before connecting the AC power cords (mains leads) of this system and the surround amplifier to a wall outlet (mains), connect the front and center speakers to the system (page 17) and the surround speakers to the surround amplifier (page 18). Tip The IR transmitter is movable for easy reorientation. Notes • Make sure that there is no obstruction such as a person or object between the IR transmitter and the IR receiver of the surround amplifier. Otherwise, the sound from the surround speakers may be interrupted. • If the POWER/ON LINE indicator turns red, the transmission is incomplete. Adjust the position of the IR transmitter and the surround amplifier until the POWER/ON LINE indicator turns green. • If the POWER/ON LINE indicator flashes in red, the IR receiver of the surround amplifier is receiving an infrared ray from another Sony’s wireless product. Move the IR transmitter and/or the surround amplifier so that the POWER/ON LINE indicator turns green. POWER/ON LINE indicator 1 Press "/1 on the system, and POWER on the surround amplifier to turn on. The system and surround amplifier turn on and the POWER/ON LINE indicator turns red. 2 Orient the IR transmitter and the IR receiver of the surround amplifier to face each other. Adjust the position until the POWER/ON LINE indicator turns green. continued 29GB Example for installation Position the IR transmitter and surround amplifier as illustrated. Install the IR transmitter and IR receiver of the surround amplifier in direct line with each other, and adjust the orientation of the IR transmitter and the surround amplifier until the POWER/ON LINE indicator turns green. Top view Center speaker Front speaker (L) Front speaker (R) IR transmitter TV Subwoofer Listening position IR receiver of the surround amplifier Surround speaker (L) Surround speaker (R) Using the IR receiver Depending on the speaker layout (i.e. when placing the surround amplifier toward the listening position, etc.), or when there is obstruction, such as a person or object between the IR transmitter and the IR receiver of the surround amplifier, you can use the external IR receiver (supplied) instead. The IR receiver is compact and easy to install. To connect the IR receiver Connect the cord of the IR receiver to the DIR-R2 jack of the surround amplifier. Rear of the surround amplifier IR receiver SURROUND L SPEAKER SPEAKER SURROUND R DIR-R2 Notes • When you connect the IR receiver to the surround amplifier, the IR receiver is activated and the IR receiver of the surround amplifier is not activated automatically. • When using the IR receiver, install it following the guidelines of the IR receiver of the surround amplifier. 30GB Hanging the surround amplifier on a wall 1 Secure the mounting plate to the wall using the screws (not supplied). Getting Started Depending on the desired layout of the speakers, you can hang the surround amplifier on a wall. You can also hang the surround amplifier attached to the surround speakers. Mounting plate 2 Hook the rear hollow of the surround amplifier on the mounting plate as shown. Surround amplifier Mounting plate Make sure that the surround amplifier is secured tightly. Notes • Use screws suitable to the wall material and strength. • Do not hang the surround amplifier to the weak wall. • Sony is not liable for any damage or injury caused by improper installation, insufficient wall strength, mishandling, or disaster. • Do not hang or place anything on the surround amplifier or the surround speakers. The mounting plate or the speakers may fall down, which may cause injury. continued 31GB Hanging the IR transmitter and IR receiver on a wall You can hang the IR transmitter and IR receiver on a wall when: – there is an obstruction between the IR transmitter and the IR receiver. – people often pass between the IR transmitter and the IR receiver. When hanging both the IR transmitter and IR receiver, adjust the position of the IR transmitter after deciding the position of the IR receiver. To hang the IR receiver on a wall 1 Install a commercially available screw in the wall so that it protrudes 4 mm. To hang the IR transmitter on a wall 1 Rotate the stand of the IR transmitter. IR transmitter 4 mm 2 Stand Detach the IR receiver stand and hang it via hole on the rear side of the IR receiver on the screw. Make sure that the IR receiver does not move after installation. 2 Install 2 commercially available screws in the wall so that it protrudes 4 mm. Install the screws 30 mm apart. IR receiver 30 mm 4 mm IR receiver stand Tip When reattaching the IR receiver stand to the IR receiver, attach the stand so that both delta marks on the IR receiver and stand are aligned (page 13). 32GB 3 Hang the IR transmitter via hole on the bottom of the stand on the screw. IR transmitter • Use screws suitable for the material and strength of the wall. • Do not install the IR transmitter or IR receiver to a wall of low strength. • Sony is not liable for any damage or accident incurred by incorrect installation (i.e. low strength wall, etc.), incorrect use of this product, or natural disaster. • When connecting/disconnecting cords, detach the IR transmitter or IR receiver from the wall first. Getting Started Make sure that the IR transmitter does not move after installation. Notes Stand Tip You can store the cords in the troughs in the bottom of the stand. Stand Troughs 33GB Step 6: Performing the Quick Setup After completing the first 4 steps, make initial settings using the Quick Setup. You can set the initial setting of [LANGUAGE SETUP], [ROOM SIZE], [LISTENING POSITION], and [TV TYPE] step by step. After performing the Quick Setup, the system is ready for playing back of movies, music CDs, etc. To perform further speakers settings, see “Settings for the Speakers” on page 87. How to use the Quick Setup 5 Press ENTER. [LANGUAGE SETUP] appears. LANGUAGE SETUP "/1 ENGLISH FRANÇAIS DEUTSCH ITALIANO ESPAÑOL NEDERLANDS DANSK SVENSKA SUOMI PORTUGUÉS FUNCTION C/X/x/c/ ENTER O RETURN DVD SETUP Notes • The selectable language is different depending on the area. • The language you select in [LANGUAGE SETUP] is also used for [OSD], [DVD MENU], and [SUBTITLE] (page 83). • Depending on the area, [Others t] appears on the language list. In this case, you can select the desired language for [DVD MENU] and [SUBTITLE] from the “Language Code List” (page 108). Select [Others t] using X/x, then press ENTER. Number buttons CLEAR With cover opened. 1 2 3 4 Turn on your TV. Switch the input selector on the TV to this system. Press "/1. Press FUNCTION to select “DVD.” The guide message appears on the TV screen. Note When a disc is in the system, the guide message does not appear on the TV screen. 6 Select a language using X/x, then press ENTER. (When you select a language from the language code list, select the code number using the number buttons, then press ENTER.) Setting is selected and [ROOM SIZE] appears. ROOM SIZE SMALL FRONT: 1.6m SURROUND: 1.6m 34GB 7 Setting is selected and [LISTENING POSITION] appears. LISTENING POSITION FRONT: 1.6m SURROUND: 1.6m The [LISTENING POSITION] number you can select varies, depending on the [ROOM SIZE] setting. [SMALL]: Three positions [MEDIUM]: Four positions [LARGE]: Five positions 8 Notes • When you press CLEAR in guide message, the message disappears. When you need to change settings, select [QUICK] from [SETUP] in Setup Display (page 92). • When you select [4:3] in [TV TYPE], [4:3 LETTER BOX] is selected (page 83). • The distance and level of each speaker will be set automatically according to the selection of [ROOM SIZE] and [LISTENING POSITION] (page 87). • If you want to change each setting, see “Using the Setup Display” on page 82. • The illustrations displayed for [ROOM SIZE] and [LISTENING POSITION] are only examples and may differ from the actual room size and layout. The settings for [SPEAKER SETUP] (page 87) do not appear on these displays. Getting Started Select a suitable room size from [SMALL], [MEDIUM], or [LARGE] using X/x, then press ENTER. Select a suitable listening position using X/x, then press ENTER. Setting is selected and [TV TYPE] appears. TV TYPE 16 : 9 9 4:3 Select a TV type connecting to the system using C/c, then press ENTER. The Quick Setup is complete. When the Quick Setup is completed, the settings are saved and the guide message will not appear the next time you turn on the system. If you make a mistake Press O RETURN, then select the item again. To quit the Quick Setup Press DVD SETUP in any Step. 35GB Speaker Setup Positioning the speakers For the best possible surround sound, all the speakers other than the subwoofer should be the same distance from the listening position (A). However, this system allows you to place the center speaker up to 1.6 meters closer (B) and the surround speakers up to 4.6 meters closer (C) to the listening position. The front speakers can be placed from 1.0 to 7.0 meters (A) from the listening position. Place speakers as illustrated below About magnetically shielded speakers (to prevent color irregularity occurring on the TV screen) The subwoofer in this system is magnetically shielded to prevent magnetic leakage. However, some leakage may occur, as a high-strength magnet is employed. If the subwoofer is used with a CRT-based TV or projector, install the subwoofer at least 0.3 meter from the TV set. If it is installed too close, color irregularity may occur on the screen. If color irregularity occurs, turn off the TV set once, then turn it on after 15 to 30 minutes. If color irregularity occurs again, place the subwoofer farther away from the TV set. If color irregularity still occurs after performing the above, make sure that no magnetic object is placed near the subwoofer. Color irregularity may occur as a result of interaction between the subwoofer and the magnetic object. Examples of possible sources of magnetic interference include: magnetic latches on a TV stand, etc., healthcare devices, toys, etc. Specifying the speaker parameters Notes • Do not place the center and surround speakers farther away from the listening position than the front speakers. • When you connect an optional surround back speaker, place the surround back speaker behind the listening position (place (D) as illustrated above). In this case, set [SURROUND BACK] to [YES] in the [SIZE] setting (page 87) to output sound from the surround back speaker. 36GB To obtain the best possible surround sound, first specify the distance of the speakers from your listening position, then set the level and balance. Use the test tone to adjust the speaker level and balance to the same level. Select [SPEAKER SETUP] in the setup display. For details, see “Settings for the Speakers” (page 87). 4 Load a disc. Playing Discs With the playback side facing down Depending on the DVD or VIDEO CD, some operations may be different or restricted. Refer to the operation details supplied with your disc. Disc slot "/1 STANDBY indicator Z FUNCTION Playing Discs Push the disc into the disc slot until the disc is pulled in automatically. The disc is drawn into the system automatically and “READING” appears in the front panel display. Playing Discs Adjust the volume Connect headphones "/1 Z FUNCTION H 5 Press H on the remote or system. on the The system starts playback (continuous play). Adjust the volume on the system. After following Step 5 Depending on the disc, a menu may appear on the TV screen. You can play the disc interactively by following the instructions on the menu. (DVD: page 40), (VIDEO CD: page 40). To remove the disc 1 2 3 Turn on your TV. Switch the input selector on the TV to this system. Press "/1 on the system. The system turns on. Unless the mode of the system is set to “DVD,” press FUNCTION to select “DVD.” “NO DISC” appears in the front panel display and the system is ready for loading the disc. Press Z. Remove the disc after it is ejected from the system. “NO DISC” appears in the front panel display. To turn on the system Press "/1 on the system. The system turns on. In standby mode, the system also turns on by loading a disc. continued 37GB To turn off the system Press "/1. The system enters standby mode and the STANDBY indicator lights up in red. To turn off the system completely, remove the AC power cord (mains lead) from the wall outlet (mains). While playing a disc, do not turn off the system by pressing "/1. Doing so may cancel the menu settings. When you turn off the system, first press x to stop playback and then press "/1. Additional operations Z X ./> x H MUTING VOL +/– To save the power in standby mode Press "/1 while the system turns on (the STANDBY indicator on the system lights up). To Press To cancel standby mode Stop x Press "/1 once. Pause* X Resume play after pause X or H Go to the next chapter, track, scene, or file in continuous play mode > Go back to the preceding . chapter, track, scene, or file in continuous play mode Stop play and remove the disc Z Mute the sound MUTING. To cancel muting, press it again or VOL + to adjust the sound volume. * You cannot pause during JPEG playback. Notes • If there is no disc in the system, “NO DISC” appears on the front panel display. • If DVD playback is paused for approximately one hour, the system automatically turns off. Tip If a DVD has more than two titles, you cannot go to the next title or go back to the preceding title by pressing . or >. These buttons work only within a single title. If you want to go to the next title or go back to preceding title, press DVD TOP MENU or DVD MENU and then select the title you want to go to from the control menu. 38GB Tip (Resume Play) When you stop the disc, the system remembers the point where you pressed x and “RESUME” appears in the front panel display. As long as you do not remove the disc, Resume Play will work even if the system enters standby mode by pressing "/1. H 1 To play from the beginning of the disc, press x twice, then press H. Playing Discs Resuming Playback from the Point Where You Stopped the Disc x While playing a disc, press x to stop playback. “RESUME” appears in the front panel display, so you can restart the disc from the point where you stopped the disc. If “RESUME” does not appear, Resume Play is not available. 2 Press H. The system starts playback from the point where you stopped the disc in Step 1. Notes • You cannot perform Resume Play during Shuffle Play or Program Play. • Depending on where you stop the disc, the system may not resume playback from exactly the same point. • The point where you stopped playing is cleared if: – you change the play mode. – you change the setting on the Setup Menu. 39GB Using the DVD’s Menu A DVD is divided into a lot of sections, which make up a picture or music feature. These sections are called “titles.” When you play a DVD which contains several titles, you can select the title you want using DVD TOP MENU/ALBUM–. When you play DVDs that allow you to select items such as the language for the subtitles and the language for the sound, select these items using DVD MENU/ALBUM+. Playing VIDEO CDs with PBC Functions (Ver. 2.0) (PBC Playback) With PBC (Playback Control) functions, you can enjoy simple interactive operations, search functions, and other such operations. PBC playback allows you to play VIDEO CDs interactively by following the menu on the TV screen. ./> DVD TOP MENU/ ALBUM– DVD MENU/ ALBUM+ x H X/x/ ENTER C/X/x/c/ ENTER O RETURN Number buttons Number buttons With cover opened. With cover opened. 1 Press DVD TOP MENU/ALBUM– or DVD MENU/ALBUM+. The disc’s menu appears on the TV screen. The contents of the menu vary from disc to disc. 2 3 Press C/X/x/c or the number buttons to select the item you want to play or change. Press ENTER. Note If the DVD top menu or a DVD menu is displayed during DVD playback for approximately one hour, the system automatically turns off. 40GB 1 Start playing a VIDEO CD with PBC functions. The menu for your selection appears. 2 3 4 Select the item number you want by pressing X/x or the number buttons. Press ENTER. Follow the instructions in the menu for interactive operations. Refer to the operation details supplied with the disc, as the operating procedure may differ, depending on the VIDEO CD. To go back to the menu Press O RETURN. Notes Tip To play without using PBC, press ./> or the number buttons while the system is stopped to select a track, then press H or ENTER. “Play without PBC” appears on the TV screen and the system starts continuous play. You cannot play still pictures such as a menu. To return to PBC playback, press x twice, then press H. Playing an MP3 Audio Track You can play MP3 audio tracks on CD-ROMs, CD-Rs, or CD-RWs. However, the discs must be recorded according to ISO9660 level 1, level 2, or Joliet format for the system to recognize the tracks. You can also play discs recorded in Multi Session. See the instructions of the CD-R/RW device or recording software (not supplied) for details on the recording format. 1 2 Playing Discs • Depending on the VIDEO CD, the menu does not appear in Step 1. • Depending on the VIDEO CD, “Press ENTER” in Step 3 may appear as “Press SELECT” in the instructions supplied with the disc. In this case, press H. Load a data disc recorded in MP3 into the system. Press H. The system starts to play the first MP3 audio track in the first album on the disc. Notes • The system can play MP3 (MPEG1 Audio Layer3) audio. The system cannot play audio tracks in MP3PRO format. • This system can play Multi Session CDs when an MP3 audio track is located in the first session. Any subsequent MP3 audio tracks, recorded in the later sessions, can also be played back. • Maximum number of albums on a disc: 99 (The maximum number of MP3 audio tracks that can be contained on an album is 250.) • An album that does not include an MP3 audio track is skipped. • If you put the extension “.MP3” to data not in MP3 format, the system cannot recognize the data properly and will generate a loud noise which could damage your speaker system. • If the system cannot play MP3, set [DATA CD PRIORITY] to [MP3] in the [CUSTOM SETUP] setting (page 86). • The system can play to a depth of 8 directories, including a root directory. continued 41GB Selecting an album and track 4 Select (TRACK) using X/x and press ENTER. The list of tracks contained in the current album appears. HOME TOWN ROCK BEST HIT DVD TOP MENU/ ALBUM– DVD MENU/ ALBUM+ C/X/x/c/ ENTER DVD DISPLAY 1 O RETURN When the list of all tracks or albums cannot be displayed on the window, the jump bar appears. Press c to select the jump bar icon, and then scroll the jump bar to display the rest of the list using X/x. Press C or O RETURN to return to the track or the album list. Press DVD DISPLAY. The Control Menu and name of the MP3 data disc appears. 2 Press X/x to select then press ENTER or c. (ALBUM) 5 The list of albums contained in the disc appears. HOME TOWN MP3 1.HIGHWAY 2.VIEW POINT 3.MY CHILDREN 4.DANCING 5.GOOD TASTE 6.DESTINATION 7.MARATHON 8.PLACE-KICK 9.TAKE IT EASY 10.PORT TOWER 11.STANDARD Select a track using X/x and press ENTER. The selected track starts playing. To return to the previous display MP3 ROCK BEST HIT KARAOKE JAZZ R&B MY FAVORITE SONGS CLASSICAL SALSA OF CUBA BOSSANOVA Press O RETURN or C. To turn off the display Press DVD DISPLAY. Notes 3 Select an album you want to play using X/x and press ENTER. • Only alphabetical letters and numbers can be used for album or track names. Anything else is displayed as “ ”. • If the MP3 file you play back has an ID3 tag, the ID3 tag information is displayed as a track name. • ID3 tag applies only to version 1. • If an MP3 file of VBR (variable bit rate) is played, indicated elapsed time may be different from the actual time. • Until playing the disc or selecting an album in step 2, album name is displayed as “**ALBUM” (** refers to a number) in the Control Menu, after which the album name is displayed. Tip When an MP3 data disc is inserted, you can select an album using the DVD MENU/ALBUM+ or DVD TOP MENU/ALBUM– on the remote. 42GB Playing JPEG Image Files 1 2 Load a data disc recorded in JPEG into the system. Press H. The system starts to play the first JPEG image file in the first album on the disc. Notes • The system can play the extension “.JPG” or “.JPEG.” • The system can play Multi Session CDs. • An album that does not include a JPEG file is skipped. • If the system cannot play JPEG, set [DATA CD PRIORITY] to [JPEG] in the [CUSTOM SETUP] setting (page 86). • A JPEG image file of a length or width of more than 4,720 dots cannot be played. • A JPEG image file with a high width to length ratio cannot be displayed. • Some CD-Rs or CD-RWs cannot be played on this system depending on file format. • The system can play to a depth of 8 directories, including a root directory. • Progressive JPEG image files cannot be played on this system. • Maximum number of albums on a disc: 99 (The maximum number of JPEG image files that can be contained on an album is 250.) Tip When you go to the next file or to go back to the previous file, press . or >. DVD TOP MENU/ ALBUM– DVD MENU/ ALBUM+ C/X/x/c/ ENTER DVD DISPLAY 1 O RETURN Playing Discs You can play JPEG image files on CD-ROMs, CD-Rs, or CD-RWs. However, the discs must be recorded according to ISO9660 level 1, level 2 or Joliet format for the system to recognize the files. You can also play discs recorded in Multi Session. See the instructions of the CD-R/RW device or recording software (not supplied) for details on the recording format. Selecting an album and file Press DVD DISPLAY. The Control Menu and name of the JPEG data disc appears. 2 Press X/x to select then press ENTER or c. (ALBUM) The list of albums contained in the disc appears. MOUNTAIN JPEG FAMILY FLOWER GARDEN TRAIN CAR 3 4 Select an album you want to play using X/x and press ENTER. Select press ENTER. (FILE) using X/x and The list of files contained in the current album appears. MOUNTAIN FAMILY JPEG 1.HAPPY 2.BIRTHDAY 3.CELEBRATION 4.CHRISTMAS 5.MOM 6.BASEBALL 7.PARTY 8.DAD 9.TRAVEL 10.FRIEND 11.DRIVE continued 43GB When the list of all files or albums cannot be displayed on the window, the jump bar appears. Press c to select the jump bar icon, and then scroll the jump bar to display the rest of the list using X/x. Press C or O RETURN to return to the file or the album list. 5 Enjoying Slide show on a JPEG data disc M Select a file using X/x and press ENTER. H The selected file starts playing. To return to the previous display Press O RETURN or C. To turn off the display Press DVD DISPLAY. Notes • Only alphabetical letters and numbers can be used for album or file names. Anything else is displayed as “ ”. • Until playing the disc or selecting an album in step 2, album name is displayed as “**ALBUM” (** refers to a number) in the Control Menu, after which the album name is displayed. 1 Slide show starts from the current image. 2 Press H when you want to exit Slide show. Return to normal play from the current image. Tip When a JPEG data disc is inserted, you can select an album using the DVD MENU/ALBUM+ or DVD TOP MENU/ALBUM- on the remote. Press M while displaying a JPEG image. To change the interval time of Slide show Each time you press M during Slide show, the interval time changes. With each press, the indication changes as follows: t 1M t 2M t 3M The 3M interval time is faster than 2M. Note Slide show can play in only one direction. 44GB To rotate the current image Creating Your Own Program (Program Play) C/c You can play the contents of a disc in the order you want by arranging the order of the tracks and albums on the disc to create your own program. You can program up to 25 tracks and albums. Playing Discs H Rotate the current image using C/c. Each time you press c, the image turns clockwise by 90º. Each time you press C, the image turns anticlockwise by 90º. Note H C/X/x/c/ ENTER ORETURN REPEAT You cannot rotate the image during Slide show. Press H to return to normal play before this operation. PLAY MODE Number buttons CLEAR With cover opened. 1 In stop mode, press PLAY MODE repeatedly until “PGM” appears in the front panel display. The Program Menu appears on the TV screen. For example, select a track on an MP3 disc. Program 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Total Time - - : - - continued 45GB To check the tracks or albums that you have already created once, press C to select the jump bar icon, and then scroll the jump bar to display the rest of the list using X/x. Press c or O RETURN to return to the track list. You can select the jump bar icon only if there are more than 9 programmed tracks or albums. 2 Program 1 Album 2 1 ALBUM Track 3 2 ALBUM ALL TRACKS 4 3 ALBUM 1 TRACK1 5 4 ALBUM 2 TRACK2 6 5 ALBUM 3 TRACK3 7 4 TRACK4 8 5 TRACK5 9 6 TRACK6 10 7 TRACK7 8 TRACK8 9 TRACK9 Press X/x or the number buttons to select “7” then press ENTER. Total time of the programmed tracks (except MP3) Program 1 ALBUM 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Press c. The cursor moves to the track (in this case, “1”). Before programming the MP3 tracks, it is required to select the album. 3 4 5 Total Time - - : - - Total Time - - : - TRACK 7 To program other tracks, repeat Steps 2 to 4. The programmed tracks are displayed in the selected order. 6 Press H to start Program Play. Program Play begins. When the program ends, you can restart the same program again by pressing H. To select a track that is not displayed on the window, press c to select the jump bar icon, and then scroll the jump bar to display the rest of the list using X/x. Press C or O RETURN to return to the track list. You can select the jump bar icon only if there are more than 9 tracks. To return to normal play To Do this Select the track you want to program. Turn off the Program Menu In stop mode, press PLAY MODE to turn off the Program Menu. Cancel the programmed order Press CLEAR in Step 5, and the last program is cancelled one by one. For example, select track “7.” Program 1 Album 2 1 ALBUM Track 3 2 ALBUM ALL TRACKS 4 3 ALBUM 1 TRACK1 5 4 ALBUM 2 TRACK2 6 5 ALBUM 3 TRACK3 7 4 TRACK4 8 5 TRACK5 9 6 TRACK6 10 7 TRACK7 8 TRACK8 9 TRACK9 Total Time - - : - - In stop mode, press PLAY MODE repeatedly until “PGM” disappears from the front panel display. Other Operations Notes • Program Play function is not available for DVDs and JPEG. • When you remove the disc, Program Play is cancelled and the program you created is cleared. • When you program MP3 tracks, “- - : - -” is displayed as the total time of the programmed tracks. Tip You can perform Repeat Play of programmed tracks. Press REPEAT, or set [REPEAT] to [ALL] in the Control Menu display during Program Play (page 48). 46GB Playing in Random Order (Shuffle Play) Setting the shuffle mode in the Control Menu You can select either normal shuffle or album shuffle (MP3 only). Playing Discs You can have the system “shuffle” tracks and play them in random order. Subsequent “shuffling” will produce a different playing order. H C/X/x/c/ ENTER DVD DISPLAY H 1 Press DVD DISPLAY. The Control Menu appears. PLAY MODE 2 Press X/x to select (PLAY MODE), then press ENTER or c. HOME TOWN ROCK BEST HIT (15) CONTINUE CONTINUE(ALBUM) SHUFFLE SHUFFLE(ALBUM) PROGRAM With cover opened. 1 In stop mode, press PLAY MODE repeatedly until “SHUF” appears in the front panel display. When you play an MP3 disc, you can play all tracks in albums in random order. For details on album shuffle, see page 47. 2 3 Select [SHUFFLE] or [SHUFFLE (ALBUM)] using X/x and press ENTER. [SHUFFLE]: Plays tracks on the disc in random order. [SHUFFLE (ALBUM)]: Plays tracks from selected album in random order. Press H. To return to normal play In stop mode, press PLAY MODE repeatedly until “SHUF” disappears from the front panel display (SHUFFLE cancelled). The same applies to cancel SHUFFLE (ALBUM). MP3 4 Press H. The selected Shuffle Play begins. Note Shuffle Play is cancelled when you eject the disc. The play mode changes in the following sequence: SHUFFLE t CONTINUE SHUFFLE (ALBUM) t CONTINUE (ALBUM) 47GB x When playing a DVD Playing Repeatedly • OFF: does not play repeatedly. • ALL: repeats all the titles. • TITLE: repeats the current title on a disc. • CHAPTER: repeats the current chapter. (Repeat Play) You can play all the titles/tracks/files or a single title/chapter/track on a disc. In Shuffle or Program Play mode, the system repeats tracks in shuffled or programmed order. You cannot perform Repeat Play during PBC playback of VIDEO CDs (page 40). x When playing a VIDEO CD/Super Audio CD/CD/MP3, and when Program Play is set to OFF • OFF: does not play repeatedly. • ALL: repeats all the tracks on the disc, or repeats the current album (only when CONTINUE (ALBUM) or SHUFFLE (ALBUM) in the play mode is selected). • TRACK: repeats the current track. H x When playing a JPEG • OFF: does not play repeatedly. • ALL: repeats all the files on the disc (when CONTINUE is selected in the play mode), or repeats the current album (when CONTINUE (ALBUM) is selected in the play mode). C/X/x/c/ ENTER DVD DISPLAY REPEAT x When Program Play is set to ON • OFF: does not play repeatedly. • ALL: repeats Program Play. With cover opened. 1 Notes • Depending on the DVD disc, Repeat Play does not work. • Repeat Play is cancelled when you eject the disc. • If [ALL] is selected, Repeat Play is limited to 5 times. Press DVD DISPLAY. The Control Menu appears. 2 Press X/x to select (REPEAT), then press ENTER or c. Tips If you do not select [OFF], the [REPEAT] indicator lights in green. 3 Select the Repeat Play setting, then press ENTER. DVD 1 2 ( 2 7 ) TITLE12 18(34) T 1:32:55 OFF ALL TITLE CHAPTER 48GB DVD • You can set Repeat Play during stop mode. After selecting the [REPEAT] item, press H. The system starts Repeat Play. • You can quickly display the [REPEAT] status. Press REPEAT on the remote. • You can perform Repeat Play for DVD titles that contain chapters. (Scan, Slow-motion Play) Each time you press m or M during scan, the playback speed changes. Two speeds are available. With each press, the indication changes as follows: Playback direction 1M t 2M Playing Discs You can locate a particular point on a disc quickly by monitoring the picture or by playing back slowly. To change the scan speed (DVD/ VIDEO CD only) t Searching for a Particular Point on a Disc t Opposite direction 1m t 2m H SLOW m/M / The 2M/2m playback speed is faster than 1M/1m. Watching frame by frame (Slow-motion Play) (DVD/VIDEO CD only) Notes • Depending on the DVD/VIDEO CD, you may not be able to perform some of the operations described. • During Scan or Slow-motion Play, no sound is output. Press or pause mode. when the system is in the To return to normal speed, press H. To change the speed of Slowmotion Play Each time you press or during Slowmotion Play, the playback speed changes. Two speeds are available. With each press, the indication changes as follows: 1 2 Playback direction 2 t1 When you find the point you want, press H to return to normal speed. Opposite direction (DVD only) 2 t1 t Press m or M while playing a disc. t Locating a point quickly by playing a disc in fast forward or fast reverse (Scan) The 2 1 /1 /2 . playback speed is slower than 49GB x When playing a DVD Searching for a Title/ Chapter/Track/Index/ Album/File (TITLE) x When playing a VIDEO CD (TRACK) x When playing a Super Audio CD (TRACK) x When playing a CD You can search a title (DVD), chapter (DVD), track (CD, VIDEO CD, Super Audio CD, MP3), index (VIDEO CD, Super Audio CD), album (MP3, JPEG), and file (JPEG). As titles, tracks albums and files are assigned unique names on the disc, you can select the desired one from the Control Menu. Also chapters and indexes are assigned unique numbers on the disc, so you select the desired one by entering its number. Or you can search a particular point using the time code (TIME SEARCH). You cannot search a scene of a VIDEO CD (when the PBC function is on). (TRACK) x When playing an MP3 (ALBUM) or (TRACK) x When displaying a JPEG file (ALBUM) or Example: when you select (TRACK) The list of tracks contained in the disc appears. CD When the list of all tracks or albums cannot be displayed on the window, the jump bar appears. Press c to select the jump bar icon, and then scroll the jump bar to display the rest of the list using X/x. Press C or O RETURN to return to the track or the album list. ORETURN DVD DISPLAY Number buttons CLEAR CD Searching for a title/track/ album/file Press DVD DISPLAY. The Control Menu appears. Press X/x to select the search method, then press ENTER or c. CD 13.STAY 14.BAD 15.BEAUTIFUL 16.HOLD.ME 17.FIRST TIME 18.BLUE SKY 19.OUR EARTH 20.NO NAME 21.SWEETEST 22.KISS ME 23.FIRE 24.ANGEL With cover opened. 2 CD 1.HIGHWAY 2.VIEW POINT 3.MY CHILDREN 4.DANCING 5.GOOD TASTE 6.DESTINATION 7.MARATHON 8.PLACE-KICK 9.TAKE IT EASY 10.PORT TOWER 11.STANDARD 12.LADY C/X/x/c/ ENTER 1 (FILE) 3 Press X/x to select the desired track, then press ENTER. The system starts playback from the selected track. continued 50GB Searching for a chapter/index 1 Press ENTER. The system starts playback from the selected number. Press DVD DISPLAY. The Control Menu appears. Note Press X/x to select the search method. When you play a VIDEO CD with PBC functions, the index search function does not work. x When playing a DVD To turn off the Control Menu (CHAPTER) x When playing a VIDEO CD (without PBC functions) (INDEX) x When playing a Super Audio CD (INDEX) Example: when you select (CHAPTER) “** (**)” is selected (** refers to a number). The number in parentheses indicates the total number of chapters or indexes. DVD 1 2 ( 2 7 ) TITLE12 18(34) T DVD 1:32:55 Press DVD DISPLAY repeatedly until the Control Menu is turned off. To search for a particular point using the time code (TIME SEARCH) Playing Discs 2 5 Example: If you search for the playing time of the current title on a DVD 1 In Step 2, select (TIME). “T **:**:**” (playing time of the current title) is selected. 2 Press ENTER or c. “T--:--:--” appears above “T**:**:**.” 3 Input the time code using the number buttons, then press ENTER. For example, to find a desired point at 2 hours, 10 minutes, and 20 seconds after the beginning, just enter “2:10:20.” Notes 3 Press ENTER or c. “** (**)” changes to “-- (**).” DVD 1 2 ( 2 7 ) TITLE12 ––(34) T 1:32:55 DVD • The title, chapter or track number displayed is the same number recorded on the disc. • The time search function does not work on a VIDEO CD (when the PBC function is on). • If you play a DVD, input the playing time of the current title using the time code. If you play a CD, Super Audio CD, VIDEO CD, or MP3, input the playing time of the current track using the time code. Tip You can change the display to show playing time or remaining time. For details, see “Checking the Playing Time and Remaining Time” (page 54). 4 Press X/x or the number buttons to select the chapter or index number you want to search. If you make a mistake Cancel the number by pressing CLEAR, then select another number. 51GB Viewing Disc Information When playing back a DVD Playing time and number of the current title TITLE Viewing the playing time and remaining time in the front panel display You can check disc information, such as the remaining time, total number of titles in a DVD, or tracks in a Super Audio CD, CD, VIDEO CD, or MP3, using the front panel display (page 103). CHAP Remaining time and number of the current title TITLE CHAP Playing time and number of the current chapter CHAP Remaining time and number of the current chapter CHAP DISPLAY Title name Current sound field Press DISPLAY. Each time you press DISPLAY while playing the disc, the display changes as shown in the charts. 52GB When playing back a VIDEO CD (without PBC functions), Super Audio CD or CD When playing back an MP3 Playing time and current track number TRK Playing time and current track number Playing Discs TRK Remaining time of the current track TRK Remaining time and current track number TRK Track (file) name Playing time of the disc Album (folder) name Remaining time of the disc Current sound field Track name When playing back a JPEG Current file number Current sound field File name Album (folder) name Current sound field continued 53GB Notes • Depending on the type of disc being played and the playing mode, the disc information may not be displayed. • ID3 tag applies only to version 1. • If the MP3 file you play back has an ID3 tag, the ID3 tag information is displayed as a track (file) name. • Only alphabetical letters and numbers can be used for album, track, or file names. Anything else is displayed as “ ”. • In the following case, elapsed playing time and current track remaining time may not be displayed accurately. – when an MP3 file of VBR (variable bit rate) is played. Checking the Playing Time and Remaining Time You can check the playing time and remaining time of the current title, chapter, or track, and the total playing time or remaining time of the disc. You can also check the DVD/CD/Super Audio CD text and MP3 folder name/file name/ID3 tag (only song title) recorded on the disc. DISPLAY Tips • When playing VIDEO CDs with PBC functions, only the playing time of the scene is displayed. • The playing time and remaining time of the current chapter, title, track, scene, or disc will also appear on your TV screen. See the following section “Checking the Playing Time and Remaining Time” for details on how to read this information. DVD DISPLAY 1 Press DVD DISPLAY during playback. The Control Menu appears. DVD 1 2 ( 2 7 ) TITLE12 18(34) T 1:32:55 DVD Disc type Time information 2 Press DISPLAY repeatedly to change the time information. The display and the kinds of time that you can check depend on the disc you are playing. x When playing a DVD • T **:**:** Playing time of the current title • T–**:**:** Remaining time of the current title • C **:**:** Playing time of the current chapter 54GB • C–**:**:** Remaining time of the current chapter • **:**:** Playing time of the menu or current title without a chapter You can check the date information during playback when the Exif* tag is recorded in the JPEG image data. • **:** Playing time of the current scene x When playing a VIDEO CD (without PBC functions), Super Audio CD or CD • T **:** Playing time of the current track • T–**:** Remaining time of the current track • D **:** Playing time of the current disc • D–**:** Remaining time of the current disc x When playing an MP3 • T **:** Playing time of the current track • T–**:** Remaining time of the current track Playing Discs x When playing a VIDEO CD (with PBC functions) Checking the date information (JPEG only) DVD DISPLAY Press DVD DISPLAY during playback. The Control Menu appears. MOUNTAIN FAMILY 1 ( 2 0 ) BIRTHDAY 01 / 01/ 2004 To turn off the Control Menu JPEG Date information Press DVD DISPLAY repeatedly until the Control Menu is turned off. Notes • Only alphabetical letters and numbers can be displayed. • Depending on the type of disc being played, the system can only display a limited number of characters. Also, depending on the disc, not all text characters will be displayed. * “Exchangeable Image File Format” is a digital camera image format defined by the Japan Electronics and Information Technology Industries Association (JEITA). Note If there is no date information or data is damaged on the disc, the system cannot display the date information. Tip You can change the date information order in [JPEG DATE] of [CUSTOM SETUP] (page 86). 55GB 2 Sound Adjustments Press X/x to select then press ENTER or c. (AUDIO), The options for AUDIO appear. Changing the Sound DVD 1 2 ( 2 7 ) TITLE12 18(34) DVD T 1:32:55 1: ENGLISH 2: FRENCH 3: SPANISH If a DVD is recorded with multilingual tracks, you can select the language you want while playing the DVD. If the DVD is recorded in multiple audio formats (PCM, Dolby Digital, MPEG audio, or DTS), you can select the audio format you want while playing the DVD. With stereo CDs, VIDEO CDs, or MP3, you can select the sound from the right or left channel and listen to the sound of the selected channel through both the right and left speakers (in this case, the sound loses its stereo effect). For example, when playing a disc containing a song with the vocals on the right channel and the instruments on the left channel, you can select the left channel and hear only the instruments from both speakers. C/X/x/c/ ENTER DVD DISPLAY AUDIO With cover opened. 1 Press X/x to select the desired audio signal. x When playing a DVD Depending on the DVD, the choice of language varies. When 4 digits are displayed, they represent the language code. Refer to the language code list on page 108 to see which language the code represents. When the same language is displayed two or more times, the DVD is recorded in multiple audio formats. x When playing a VIDEO CD, CD, or MP3 The default setting is underlined. • STEREO: The standard stereo sound • 1/L: The sound of the left channel (monaural) • 2/R: The sound of the right channel (monaural) x When playing a Super Audio CD In stop mode, depending on the Super Audio CD, the choice of settings varies. • MULTI: The disc has a multi-channel playback area. • 2CH: The disc has a 2 channel playback area. • CD: When you want to play the disc as a conventional CD. Notes Press DVD DISPLAY during playback. The Control Menu is displayed. 56GB 3 • Not all discs give you the three choices above when in Super Audio CD playback. It all depends on the layer configuration of the Super Audio CD to be played. • When playing a Super Audio CD in the 2 channel playback area or the 2 CHANNEL STEREO mode, the POWER/ON LINE indicator of the surround amplifier turns red. 4 Press ENTER. To turn off the Control Menu Press DVD DISPLAY repeatedly until the Control Menu is turned off. The display examples are as follows: • PCM (stereo) PROGRAM FORMAT Notes PCM 48kHz 24bit • Dolby Surround PROGRAM FORMAT DOLBY DIGITAL 2/0 Tip DOLBY SURROUND You can select [AUDIO] directly by pressing AUDIO. Each time you press the button, the item changes. PROGRAM FORMAT Displaying the audio information of the disc (DVD only) DOLBY DIGITAL 3/2.1 • DTS When you select [AUDIO], the channels being played are displayed on the screen. For example, in Dolby Digital format, multiple signals ranging from monaural to 5.1 channel signals can be recorded on a DVD. Depending on the DVD, the number of recorded channels may differ. Current audio format* DVD 1 2 ( 2 7 ) TITLE12 18(34) • Dolby Digital 5.1ch Sound Adjustments • For discs not in multiple audio format, you cannot change the sound. • During DVD playback, the sound may change automatically. DVD T 1:32:55 1: ENGLISH PROGRAM FORMAT DTS 3/2.1 Tips • When the signal contains surround signal components such as LS, RS, or S, the surround effect is enhanced. • If you play MPEG AUDIO sound tracks, the system outputs PCM (stereo) signals. • Even though the audio stream contains a surround back component, the surround back channel is not displayed. Dolby Digital-EX or DTS-ES source is displayed as “3/2.1”on the screen. PROGRAM FORMAT DOLBY DIGITAL 3/2.1 * [PCM], [MPEG], [DTS], or [DOLBY DIGITAL] is displayed. For [DOLBY DIGITAL], the channels in the playing track are displayed numerically as follows: For Dolby Digital 5.1 ch: Surround component 2 DOLBY DIGITAL 3 / 2 . 1 Front component 2 + Center component 1 LFE (Low Frequency Effect) component 1 57GB Enjoying Surround Sound You can take advantage of surround sound simply by selecting one of system’s preprogrammed sound fields. They bring the exciting and powerful sound of movie theaters into your home. To select sound field, press AUTO FORMAT DIRECT or MODE on the remote repeatedly until the sound field you want appears in the front panel display. Automatic decoding of the audio input signal (AUTO FORMAT DIRECT AUTO) The auto decoding function automatically detects the type of audio signal being input (Dolby Digital, DTS, or standard 2 channel stereo) and performs the proper decoding if necessary. This mode presents the sound as it was recorded/encoded, without adding any effects (e.g. reverberation). However, if there are no low frequency signals (Dolby Digital LFE, etc.), it will generate a low frequency signal for output to the subwoofer. Tip When you want to output the TV sound or stereo sound of a 2 channel source from the 6 speakers of the system, select a sound field other than “AUTO FORMAT DIRECT AUTO” or “2 CHANNEL STEREO”. AUTO FORMAT DIRECT With cover opened. Press AUTO FORMAT DIRECT repeatedly until “A.F.D. AUTO” appears in the front panel display. 58GB Sound field Display AUTO FORMAT DIRECT AUTO A.F.D. AUTO Using only the front speaker and subwoofer (2 CHANNEL STEREO) Selecting a sound field (AUTO FORMAT DIRECT button) AUTO FORMAT DIRECT Sound Adjustments This mode outputs the sound from the front left and right speakers and subwoofer. Standard two channel (stereo) sources completely bypass the sound field processing. Multi channel surround formats are downmixed to two channels. This allows you to play any source using only the front left and right speakers and subwoofer. With cover opened. MODE Press AUTO FORMAT DIRECT repeatedly until the sound field you want appears in the front panel display. Sound field Display AUTO FORMAT DIRECT PRO LOGIC DOLBY PL Press MODE repeatedly until “2CH STEREO” appears in the front panel display. AUTO FORMAT DIRECT PRO LOGIC II MOVIE PLII MOVIE AUTO FORMAT DIRECT PRO LOGIC II MUSIC PLII MUSIC Sound field Display Neo:6 CINEMA NEO:6 CIN 2 CHANNEL STEREO 2CH STEREO Neo:6 MUSIC NEO:6 MUS With cover opened. x AUTO FORMAT DIRECT PRO LOGIC Dolby Pro Logic produces five output channels from two-channel sources. This mode performs Pro Logic decoding to the input signal and output to front, center, and surround speakers. Meanwhile, the surround channel becomes monaural. continued 59GB x AUTO FORMAT DIRECT PRO LOGICII MOVIE/MUSIC Dolby Pro LogicII produces five full-bandwidth output channels from two-channel sources. This is done using an advanced, high-purity matrix surround decoder that extracts the spatial properties of the original recording without adding any new sounds or tonal colorations. Selecting a sound field (MODE button) x Neo:6 CINEMA Performs the DTS Neo:6 Cinema mode decoding. x Neo:6 MUSIC MODE Performs the DTS Neo:6 Music mode decoding. This setting is ideal for standard stereo sources, such as CDs. Notes • When the input signal is a multi-channel source, PRO LOGIC, PRO LOGIC II MOVIE/MUSIC, and Neo:6 Cinema/Music are cancelled and the multi channel source is output directly. • Neo:6 Cinema/Music mode decoding is not available for DTS 2channel signal. • This system is not compatible with the DTS 96/24 decoding function. When you play the DTS 96/24 disc, the system plays it as a normal disc. With cover opened. Press MODE repeatedly until the sound field you want appears in the front panel display. For movie Sound field Display CINEMA STUDIO EX A C. ST. EX A* CINEMA STUDIO EX B C. ST. EX B* CINEMA STUDIO EX C C. ST. EX C* *Use DCS Technology About DCS (Digital Cinema Sound) In collaboration with Sony Pictures Entertainment, Sony measured the sound environment of their studios and integrated the data of the measurement and Sony’s own DSP (Digital Signal Processor) technology to develop “Digital Cinema Sound.” “Digital Cinema Sound” simulates in a home theater an ideal movie theater sound environment based on the preference of the movie director. x C. ST. EX A (Cinema Studio EX A) Reproduces the sound characteristics of the Sony Pictures Entertainment “Cary Grant Theater” cinema production studio. This is a standard mode, great for watching most any type of movie. 60GB x C. ST. EX B (Cinema Studio EX B) Reproduces the sound characteristics of the Sony Pictures Entertainment “Kim Novak Theater” cinema production studio. This mode is ideal for watching science-fiction or action movies with lots of sound effects. x C. ST. EX C (Cinema Studio EX C) About Cinema Studio EX Cinema Studio EX is ideal for enjoying the movie software encoded with multi channel format, such as the Dolby Digital DVD. This mode reproduces the sound characteristics of Sony Pictures Entertainment’s studios. Cinema Studio EX consists of the following three elements. • Virtual Multi Dimension Creates 5 sets of virtual speakers surrounding the listener from a single pair of actual surround speakers. • Screen Depth Matching In a movie theater, sound seems to come from inside the image reflected on the movie screen. This element creates the same sensation in your listening room by shifting the sound of the front speakers “into” the screen. • Cinema Studio Reverberation Reproduces the reverberations peculiar to a movie theater. Cinema Studio EX is the integrated mode which operates these elements simultaneously. Notes • The virtual speaker effect may cause increased noise in the playback signal. • When listening with sound fields that employ virtual speakers, you will not be able to hear any sound coming directly from the surround speakers. Sound field Display HALL HALL JAZZ CLUB JAZZ CLUB LIVE CONCERT L. CONCERT GAME GAME SPORTS SPORTS MONO MOVIE MONO MOVIE x HALL (Hall) Reproduces the acoustics of a rectangular concert hall. x JAZZ CLUB (Jazz club) Reproduces the acoustics of a jazz club. Sound Adjustments Reproduces the sound characteristics of the Sony Pictures Entertainment scoring stage. This mode is ideal for watching musicals or classic films where music is featured in the soundtrack. For music or others x L. CONCERT (Live concert) Reproduces the acoustics of a 300-seat live concert. x GAME (Game) Obtains maximum audio impact from video game software. x SPORTS (Sports) Simulates the arena or stadium sound. x MONO MOVIE (Mono movie) Reproduces mono sound that is good for old movies. When using headphones Sound field Display HEADPHONE 2CH HP 2CH HEADPHONE THEATER HP THEATER x HEADPHONE 2CH This mode outputs the sound from the headphone L/R. Standard 2 channel (stereo) sources completely bypass the sound field processing. Multi channel surround formats are downmixed to two channels. x HEADPHONE THEATER This mode outputs the sound as surround from headphone L/R. continued 61GB To turn the surround effect off Press AUTO FORMAT DIRECT repeatedly until “A.F.D. AUTO” appears in the front panel display. Selecting the Surround Back Decoding Mode When connecting the headphones to the PHONES jack Press AUTO FORMAT DIRECT or MODE repeatedly until “HP 2CH” appears in the front panel display. Notes • This function is unavailable when playing Super Audio CDs and when the input stream is dts 2048 frame. • When you play a Super Audio CD (Direct Stream Digital), the sound field changes to “AUTO FORMAT DIRECT AUTO” automatically. • This system is not compatible with the DTS 96/24 decoding function. When you play the DTS 96/24 disc, the system plays it as a normal disc. This function lets you select the decoding mode for the surround back signals of the multi channel input stream. By decoding the surround back signal of DVD software, etc., recorded in Dolby Digital EX, DTS-ES Matrix, DTS-ES Discrete 6.1 format, etc., you can enjoy the kind of surround sound originally intended for the film (page 98, 99). Note This function works only when you connect the surround back speaker to the system (page 20) and set [SURROUND BACK] to [YES] in the [SIZE] setting (page 87). Tips • When you want to output the TV sound or stereo sound of a 2 channel source from the 6 or 7 speakers, select any sound field other than “AUTO FORMAT DIRECT AUTO” or “2CH STEREO.” • The system memorizes the last sound field selected for each function mode. Whenever you select a function such as DVD or TUNER, the sound field that was last applied to function is automatically applied again. For example, if you listen to DVD with HALL as the sound field, then change to another function, and then return to DVD, HALL will be applied again. With the tuner, sound fields are memorized separately for all preset stations. • You can identify the encoding format of program software by looking at its packaging. – Dolby Digital discs are labeled with the logo. – DTS-ES encoded programs are marked with DTS-ES. – Dolby Surround encoded programs are labeled with the logo. – DTS Digital Surround discs are marked with DTS. ENTER X/x AMP MENU With cover opened. 1 2 3 62GB Press AMP MENU. Press X/x repeatedly until “CUSTOMIZE” appears in the front panel display, then press ENTER. Press X/x repeatedly until “SB DEC” appears in the front panel display, then press ENTER. 4 Press X/x to select the surround back mode you want according to the input stream, then press ENTER or AMP MENU. The default setting is “SB MATRIX.” When selecting “SB MATRIX” Input stream Output Applied surround back channel decoder Dolby Digital 5.1 6.1 Matrix decoder conforms to Dolby Digital EX DTS 5.1 6.1 DTS Matrix decoder Dolby Digital EXb) 6.1 Matrix decoder conforms to Dolby Digital EX DTS-ES Matrix 6.1 6.1c) DTS-ES Discrete 6.1d) 6.1 DTS Matrix decoder DTS Discrete decoder Surround back decoding is not performed. a) 6.1 channel decode flag is information recorded in software like DVD. b) Dolby Digital DVD that includes a Surround EX flag. Check the Dolby Corporation web page help for information about Surround EX films. c) Software encoded with a flag to denote it has both Surround EX and 5.1 channel signals. d) Software encoded with both 5.1 channel signals and an extension stream designed for returning those signals to 6.1 discrete channels. Discrete 6.1 channel signals are DVD specific signals, not used in movie theaters. Notes • You can select the surround back decoding only when AUTO FORMAT DIRECT AUTO mode is selected (page 58). In other sound fields, this function is bypassed internally. • Some discs have no Dolby Digital EX flag, even though their packaging may contain a Dolby Digital Surround EX logo. In this case, select “SB MATRIX.” Sound Adjustments Dolby Digital EX or DTS-ES is applied to decode the surround back signal regardless of the 6.1 channel decode flaga) in the input stream. This decoder conforms to Dolby Digital EX or DTS-ES. When selecting “SB OFF” When selecting “SB AUTO” When you input stream contains the 6.1 channel decoding flaga), the appropriate decoder is applied to decode the surround back signal. Input stream Output Applied surround back channel decoder Dolby Digital 5.1 5.1 — DTS 5.1 5.1 — Dolby Digital EXb) 6.1 Matrix decoder conforms to Dolby Digital EX DTS-ES Matrix 6.1 6.1c) DTS Matrix decoder DTS-ES Discrete 6.1d) DTS Discrete decoder 6.1 63GB Using the Sound Effect This system provides you with 2 types of sound effect, simply by pressing a button. Choose the sound to suit your needs. NIGHT MODE DSGX With cover opened. Press NIGHT MODE or DSGX on the remote. The sound effect is activated. x NIGHT MODE In this mode, you can enjoy sound effects or dialogue, as you would in a movie theater, even at low volume. It is useful for watching movies at night. x DSGX With DSGX on, bass frequencies are effectively reinforced. To turn off the sound effect Press NIGHT MODE or DSGX again. Notes • The NIGHT MODE function is activated only when the input stream is Dolby Digital format. • When you connect headphones to the system, the DSGX function does not work. • These two types of sound effect cannot be activated at the same time. • Depending on the input stream, the DSGX function may not be effective. 64GB 3 Press ENTER or c. The angle number changes to “-.” Using Various Additional Functions DVD 1 2 ( 2 7 ) TITLE12 18(34) Changing the Angles T DVD 1:32:55 –(9) 4 Select the angle number using the number buttons or X/x, then press ENTER. The angle is changed to the selected angle. To turn off the Control Menu Press DVD DISPLAY repeatedly until the Control Menu is turned off. Note C/X/x/c/ ENTER DVD DISPLAY Depending on the DVD, you may not be able to change the angles, even if multi-angles are recorded on the DVD. Tip You can select the angle directly by pressing ANGLE. Each time you press the button, the angle changes. Using Various Additional Functions If various angles (multi-angles) for a scene are recorded on a DVD, you can change the viewing angle. For example, while playing a scene of a train in motion, you can display the view from either the front of the train, the left window of the train, or from the right window without having the train’s movement interrupted. ANGLE Number Buttons With cover opened. 1 Press DVD DISPLAY during playback. The Control Menu appears. 2 Press X/x to select (ANGLE). The angle number appears. The number in parentheses indicates the total number of angles. The [ANGLE] indicator lights up in green when angles are recorded on the disc. DVD 1 2 ( 2 7 ) TITLE12 18(34) T DVD 1:32:55 1(9) 65GB 3 Displaying Subtitles If subtitles are recorded on a disc, you can turn the subtitles on or off while playing. If multilingual subtitles are recorded on the disc, you can change the subtitle language while playing, or turn the subtitles on or off whenever you want. You can select the language you want to practice, for example, turn on the subtitles for better understanding. Press X/x to select the language. Depending on the DVD, the choice of language varies. When 4 digits are displayed, they indicate the language code. Refer to the language code list on page 108 to see which language the code represents. 4 Press ENTER. To cancel the [SUBTITLE] setting Select [OFF] in Step 3. To turn off the Control Menu Press DVD DISPLAY repeatedly until the Control Menu is turned off. Note Depending on the DVD, you may not be able to change the subtitles, even if multilingual subtitles are recorded on it. C/X/x/c/ ENTER DVD DISPLAY SUBTITLE With cover opened. 1 Press DVD DISPLAY during playback. The Control Menu appears. 2 Press X/x to select (SUBTITLE), then press ENTER or c. The options for [SUBTITLE] appear. DVD 1 2 ( 2 7 ) TITLE12 18(34) T 1:32:55 OFF 1: ENGLISH 2: FRENCH 3: SPANISH 66GB DVD Tip You can select subtitles directly by pressing SUBTITLE. Each time you press the button, the language changes. 3 Locking Discs (CUSTOM PARENTAL CONTROL, PARENTAL CONTROL) Press X/x to select (CUSTOM PARENTAL CONTROL), then press ENTER or c. [CUSTOM PARENTAL CONTROL] is selected. DVD 1 2 ( 2 7 ) TITLE12 18(34) T 1:32:55 ON PASSWORD 4 Press X/x to select [ON t], then press ENTER. x If you have not entered a password yet The display for registering a new password appears. Custom Parental Control You can set the same Custom Parental Control password for up to 25 discs. If you set a 26th disc, the playback restriction of the disc for which you first set the password is cancelled. x CUSTOM PARENTAL CONTROL Enter a new 4-digit password, then press ENTER . Using Various Additional Functions You can set two kinds of playback restrictions for a disc. • Custom Parental Control You can set the playback restrictions so that the system will not play inappropriate discs. • Parental Control Playback of some DVDs can be limited according to a predetermined level, such as the age of the viewer. The same password is used for both Parental Control and Custom Parental Control. DVD Enter a 4-digit password by using the number buttons, then press ENTER. The display for confirming the password appears. x If you have already registered a password C/X/x/c/ ENTER O RETURN DVD DISPLAY Number buttons The display for entering the password appears. CUSTOM PARENTAL CONTROL Enter password, then press ENTER . With cover opened. 1 Insert the disc you want to lock. If the disc is playing, press x to stop playback. 2 In stop mode, press DVD DISPLAY. The Control Menu appears. continued 67GB 5 Enter your 4-digit password by using the number buttons, then press ENTER. [Custom parental control is set.] appears and the screen returns to the Control Menu display. Playing the disc for which Custom Parental Control is set 1 If you make a mistake entering your password Insert the disc for which Custom Parental Control is set. The [CUSTOM PARENTAL CONTROL] display appears. Press C before you press ENTER and input the correct number. CUSTOM PARENTAL CONTROL If you make a mistake Custom parental control is already set. To play, enter your password and press ENTER . Press O RETURN, then start from Step 3 again. To turn off the Control Menu Press DVD DISPLAY repeatedly until the Control Menu is turned off. 2 To turn off the Custom Parental Control function 1 2 In Step 4, select [OFF t], then press ENTER. Enter your 4-digit password using the number buttons, then press ENTER. To change the password 1 68GB In Step 4, press X/x to select [PASSWORD t], then press ENTER. The display for entering the password appears. 2 Enter your 4-digit password using the number buttons, then press ENTER. 3 Enter a new 4-digit password using the number buttons, then press ENTER. 4 To confirm your password, re-enter it using the number buttons, then press ENTER. Enter your 4-digit password using the number buttons, then press ENTER. The system is ready for playback. Notes • When you change the layer or area in a Super Audio CD which has Custom Parental Control set, the display for entering the password may appear. • When you set the Custom Parental Control password for a Hybrid Super Audio CD, the Custom Parental Control setting only works for the current layer. Tip If you forget your password, enter the 6-digit number “199703” using the number buttons when the [CUSTOM PARENTAL CONTROL] display asks you for your password, then press ENTER. The display will ask you to enter a new 4-digit password. Limiting playback for children (Parental Control) (DVD only) 3 Press X/x to select [PARENTAL CONTROL t], then press ENTER or c. x If you have not entered a password The display for registering a new password appears. Playback of some DVDs can be limited according to a predetermined level, such as the age of the viewer. The “Parental Control” function allows you to set a playback limitation level. A scene that is limited is not played, or it is replaced by a different scene. CUSTOM SETUP PARENTAL CONTROL Enter a new 4-digit password, then press ENTER . x When you have already registered a password C/X/x/c/ ENTER DVD SETUP The display for entering the password appears. O RETURN CUSTOM SETUP PARENTAL CONTROL Number buttons Enter password, then press ENTER Using Various Additional Functions Enter a 4-digit password using the number buttons, then press ENTER. The display for confirming the password appears. . With cover opened. 1 In stop mode, press DVD SETUP. The Setup Display appears. 2 Press X/x to select [CUSTOM SETUP], then press ENTER or c. 4 Enter your password using the number buttons, then press ENTER. The display for setting the playback limitation level and changing the password appears. [CUSTOM SETUP] is displayed. CUSTOM SETUP VCD COLOR SYSTEM AUTO PARENTAL CONTROL TRACK SELECTION OFF AUDIO DRC: OFF DATA CD PRIORITY: MP3 JPEG DATE: MM/DD/YYYY CUSTOM SETUP PARENTAL CONTROL LEVEL: STANDARD: CHANGE PASSWORD OFF USA continued 69GB 5 Press X/x to select [STANDARD], then press ENTER or c. The selection items for [STANDARD] are displayed. If you make a mistake Press O RETURN or C to go back to the previous screen. To turn off the Setup Display CUSTOM SETUP PARENTAL CONTROL LEVEL: OFF STANDARD: USA CHANGE PASSWORD OTHERS Press DVD SETUP repeatedly until the Setup Display is turned off. To turn off the Parental Control function and play the DVD after entering your password Set [LEVEL] to [OFF] in Step 8. 6 Press X/x to select a geographic area as the playback limitation level, then press ENTER. The area is selected. If you select [OTHERS t], select and enter the standard code in the table on page 71 using the number buttons. 7 Press X/x to select [LEVEL], then press ENTER or c. The selection items for [LEVEL] are displayed. CUSTOM SETUP PARENTAL CONTROL LEVEL: STANDARD: 8: CHANGE PASSWORD 7: 6: 5: 4: 3: 2: 1: 8 OFF NC17 R PG13 PG G Select the level you want using X/x, then press ENTER. The Parental Control setting is complete. CUSTOM SETUP PARENTAL CONTROL LEVEL: 4: STANDARD: CHANGE PASSWORD PG13 USA The lower the value, the more strict the limitation. 70GB To change the password 1 In Step 5, select [CHANGE PASSWORD t] using x, then press ENTER or c. The display for entering the password appears. 2 Follow Step 3 to enter a new password. Playing the disc for which Parental Control is set 1 2 Area Code Standard Code number Argentina 2044 Insert the disc and press H. Australia 2047 The [PARENTAL CONTROL] display appears. Austria 2046 Belgium 2057 Enter your 4-digit password using the number buttons, then press ENTER. Brazil 2070 Canada 2079 The system starts playback. Chile 2090 China 2092 • If you play a DVD which does not have the Parental Control function, playback cannot be limited on this system. • Depending on the DVD, you may be asked to change the Parental Control level while playing the disc. In this case, enter your password, then change the level. If the Resume Play mode is cancelled, the level returns to the original level. Denmark 2115 Indonesia 2238 Tip Italy 2254 If you forget your password, remove the disc and repeat Step 1 to 3 of “Limiting playback for children.” When you are asked to enter your password, enter “199703” using the number buttons, then press ENTER. The display will ask you to enter a new 4-digit password. After you enter a new 4-digit password in Step 3, replace the disc in the system and press H. When the [PARENTAL CONTROL] display appears, enter your new password. Finland 2165 France 2174 Germany 2109 Hong Kong 2219 India 2248 Japan 2276 Korea 2304 Malaysia 2363 Mexico 2362 Netherlands 2376 New Zealand 2390 Norway 2379 Pakistan 2427 Philippines 2424 Portugal 2436 Russia 2489 Singapore 2501 Spain 2149 Sweden 2499 Switzerland 2086 Taiwan 2543 Thailand 2528 United Kingdom 2184 Using Various Additional Functions Notes 71GB Code numbers of controllable TVs Other Operations Controlling TV with the Supplied Remote TV Manufacturer Code number By adjusting the remote signal, you can control your TV with the supplied remote. SONY 001 Admiral 012, 016, 039 Notes AIWA 001, 007, 008 • If you enter a new code number, the code number previously entered will be erased. • When you replace the batteries of the remote, the code number may reset itself to the default (SONY) setting. Reset the appropriate code number. AKAI 002, 010, 027 AOC 002 Bell&Howell 016, 039 Controlling TVs with the remote TV ?/1 TV/VIDEO TV button Number buttons TV CH +/– TV VOL +/– With cover opened. Press and hold TV [/1 while entering your TV’s manufacturer’s code (see the table) using the number buttons. Then release TV [/1. If you set successfully the manufacturer’s code, the TV button flashes twice slowly. If the setting is unsuccessful, the TV button flashes five times quickly. 72GB If more than one code number is listed, try entering them one at a time until you find the one that works with your TV. Bestar 027 Blaupunkt 052, 053 Blue sky 027 Brandt 045 Broksonic (Brocsonic) 002 Bush 006, 027 Clatronic 027 Croslex 034 CURTIS-MATHES 002, 046 DAEWOO 002, 003, 004, 005, 006, 027 Daytron 020 Deccacolour 037 DUAL 027 EMERSON 002, 020 Ferguson 035, 042, 045 First line 010, 027 FISHER 009, 010 FUJITSU 055 FUNAI 054 Fraba 027 General Electric 002, 012, 049 Goodmans 006, 027, 045 GRUNDIG 038, 052, 053 HITACHI 002, 013, 014, 015, 020, 021, 027 Inno-Hit 027 Irradio 027 ITT/NOKIA 025, 026 JC Penny 002, 012 JVC 018, 019 Kendo 027 Code number Manufacturer Code number Kiton 027 SYLVANIA 002, 034 KTV 002, 020 TaTung 027 LG/Goldstar 002, 020, 027, 028, 038 TEAC 027 LOEWE 027, 028, 038 Techimagen 027 LXI(Sears) 002, 009, 012, 034, 046 TELEFUNKEN 035, 041, 042, 043, 044, 045 MAGNAVOX 002, 020, 027, 034 THOMSON 035, 041, 043, 045 MARANTZ 022 Thorn 027 Mark 027 TOSHIBA 039, 046, 047, 048 Matsui 010, 052, 053 Universum 027 Medion 027 Vestel 027 Mitsubishi/MGA 002, 021, 022 Videch 002, 015 NEC 002, 020, 023, 024, 048 W.W.House 027 NEI 027 WARDS 002, 020 NOKIA 025, 026 Watson 027 Nokia Oceanic 026 ZENITH 016, 017 Nordmende 035, 042 Okano 027 ORION 007 PANASONIC 049, 050, 051 Philco 002, 004, 015, 020, 034 PHILIPS 013, 027, 034 Phoenix 027 PIONEER 029, 030, 031, 046, 049 Portland 002 Provision 027 PYE 027 QUASAR 039, 049 Radio 027 RADIO SHACK 002, 012, 022 Radiola 034 RCA/PROSCAN 002, 012, 032, 033 SABA 035, 041, 042, 043, 045 SAMSUNG 002, 013, 020, 027, 028, 036, 037, 038 SANYO 009, 010, 011 Schneider 027 SCOTT 002 SHARP 020, 039, 040 SIEMENS 052 Signature 016, 039, 040 Sinudyne 027 Supertech 027 Supervision 027 Other Operations Manufacturer continued 73GB Controlling the TV You can control your TV using the buttons below. By pressing You can TV [/1 Turn the TV on or off. TV/VIDEO Switch the TV’s input source between the TV and other input sources. TV VOL +/– Adjust the TV volume. TV CH +/– Select the TV channel. Using the SONY TV DIRECT Function SONY TV DIRECT allows you to turn on your SONY TV and this system, change the system mode to “DVD,” and then switch the TV’s input source you set with one button push. SONY TV DIRECT Using the number buttons for controlling the TV When you set the remote to the TV mode, you can use the number buttons for controlling the TV. Press the TV button. The TV button turns red and the remote is set to the TV mode. You can select the TV channels by using the number buttons. >10 is for selecting the channel number greater than 10. To cancel the TV mode, press the TV button again. TV/VIDEO TV button TV CH + Number buttons With cover opened. Notes • Depending on the TV, you may not be able to control your TV or to use some of the buttons above. • The TV button turns off when you do not operate the remote for 10 seconds. Tip Depending on the TV manufacture, the following method also works. Press >10, then the number. (For example, for channel 25, press >10, then 2 and 5.) Preparation Register the TV’s input source connected to this system. Press and hold TV/VIDEO while entering the code for the TV’s input source to connect this system (see table below) using the number buttons. TV’s input source is selected. If you successfully set the TV’s input source code, the TV button flashes twice slowly. If the setting is unsuccessful, the TV button flashes five times quickly. 74GB Notes TV’s input source TV/VIDEO 0 No input source (Default) 1 VIDEO1 2 VIDEO2 3 VIDEO3 4 VIDEO4 5 VIDEO5 6 VIDEO6 7* COMPONENT1 INPUT 8* COMPONENT2 INPUT * Except for North American models. Operation Point the remote to the direction of TV and this system, then press SONY TV DIRECT once. While transmitting the code from the remote, the TV button flashes. If this function does not work, change the transmit time. The transmit time varies depending on the TV. • This function is only for SONY TV series. • If distance between TV and this system is too far, this function may not work. Install the system near the TV. • Keep the remote pointed in the direction of the TV and this system while the TV button is flashing. Other Operations By pressing Number To change the transmit time Press and hold TV CH + while entering the code for transmit time (see table below) using the number buttons. The transmit time from the remote is selected. If you successfully set the transmit time code, the TV button flashes twice slowly. If the setting is unsuccessful, the TV button flashes five times quickly. By pressing Number Transmit time TV CH+ 1 0.5 (Default) 2 1 3 1.5 4 2 5 2.5 6 3 7 3.5 8 4 75GB Using the Video or Other Units You can use VCRs or other units connected to the VIDEO or SAT jacks. Refer to the operation manual supplied with the unit for further information on the operation. Enjoying Multiplex Broadcast Sound (DUAL MONO) You can enjoy multiplex broadcast sound when the system receive the AC-3 multiplex broadcast signal. Note FUNCTION Press FUNCTION repeatedly until VIDEO or SAT that you connected the unit to appears in the front panel display. To receive the AC-3 signal, you need to connect a digital satellite tuner to the system with an OPTICAL cable (page 26) and set the digital output mode of the digital satellite tuner to AAC. C/X/x/c/ ENTER Each time you press FUNCTION, the mode of the system changes in the following sequence. FM t AM t VIDEO t SAT t DVD t FM... AMP MENU With cover opened. 1 2 Press AMP MENU. Press x/X repeatedly until “CUSTOMIZE” appears in the front panel display, then press ENTER or c. The system enters the Customize Menu mode. 3 Press x/X repeatedly until “DUAL MONO” appears in the front panel display, then press ENTER or c. 4 Press x/X to select the sound you want. x MAIN Main sound is output from the left and right speakers. 76GB x SUB Sub sound is output from the left and right speakers. x MAIN+SUB Main sound and Sub sound are output from the left and right speakers. x MAIN/SUB Main sound is output from the left speaker and Sub sound is output from the right speaker. 5 Enjoying the Radio Presetting Radio Stations You can preset 20 FM stations, and 10 AM stations. Before tuning, make sure to turn down the volume to minimum. Press AMP MENU. TUNER/ BAND Turns off the AMP menu. TUNING –/+ Other Operations C/X/x/c/ ENTER TUNER MENU With cover opened. 1 Press TUNER/BAND repeatedly until the band you want appears in the front panel display. Each time you press TUNER/BAND, the band toggles between AM and FM. 2 Press and hold TUNING + or – until scanning starts, then release. Scanning stops when the system tunes in a station. “TUNED” and “ST” (for stereo program) appear in the front panel display. ST MHz 3 4 Press TUNER MENU. Press C/c/x/X repeatedly until “MEMORY ?” appears in the front panel display. continued 77GB 5 Press ENTER. A preset number appears in the front panel display. ST 6 Listening to the Radio Preset radio stations in the system’s memory first (see “Presetting Radio Stations” on page 77). TUNER/ BAND Press C/c/x/X to select the preset number you want. "/1 FUNCTION DISPLAY ST 7 TUNING –/+ x PRESET –/+ Press ENTER. VOL +/– The station is stored. m ST MHz FM MODE 8 Repeat 1 to 7 to store other stations. To change the preset number Restart from step 1. With cover opened. 1 To change the AM tuning interval The AM tuning interval can be set to either 10 kHz (default) or 9 kHz (for some areas). To change the AM tuning interval, first tune in any AM station, then turn off the system by pressing "/1 on the remote, or "/1 on the system. While holding down VOLUME + on the system, press "/1 on the system to turn on the power. If you change the interval, AM preset stations will be erased. To reset the interval, repeat the same procedure. Press FUNCTION repeatedly until “FM” or “AM” appears in the front panel display. The last received station is tuned in. ST MHz 2 Press PRESET + or – repeatedly to select the preset station you want. Each time you press the button, the system tunes in one preset station. Each time you press TUNER/BAND, the band toggles between AM and FM. 3 Adjust the volume by pressing VOL +/–. To turn off the radio Press "/1. 78GB To listen to non-preset radio stations Naming Preset Stations Use manual or automatic tuning in Step 2. For manual tuning, press TUNING + or – on the remote repeatedly. For automatic tuning, press and hold TUNING + or – on the remote. Press x when you stop the automatic tuning. You can enter a name of up to 8 characters for preset stations. These names (for example, “XYZ”) appear in the system’s front panel display when a station is selected. Note that no more than one name can be entered for each preset station. Tips TUNER/ BAND FUNCTION PRESET –/+ Other Operations • If an FM program is noisy, press FM MODE on the remote so that “MONO” appears in the front panel display. There will be no stereo effect, but the reception will improve. Press the button again to restore the stereo effect. • To improve reception, reorient the supplied antennas (aerials). C/X/x/c/ ENTER To check the frequency or sound field Press DISPLAY repeatedly. Each time you press DISPLAY, the front panel display changes as follows: index name of the station* t frequency t sound field t index name of the station... * This is displayed if you have entered a name for a preset station (page 79). TUNER MENU With cover opened. 1 Press FUNCTION repeatedly until “FM” or “AM” appears in the front panel display. Each time you press TUNER/BAND, the band toggles between AM and FM. The last station you received is tuned in. Each time you press FUNCTION, the mode of the system changes in the following sequence: FM t AM t VIDEO t SAT t DVD t FM... 2 3 4 5 Press PRESET+ or – repeatedly to select the preset station you want to create an index name for. Press TUNER MENU. Press C/c repeatedly until “NAME IN?” appears in the front panel display. Press ENTER. continued 79GB 6 Create an index name by using the cursor buttons: Press X/x to select a character, then press c to move the cursor to the next position. If you make a mistake Press C/c repeatedly until the character to be changed flashes, then press X/x to select the desired character. Capital letters, numbers, and other symbols can be input for a radio station name. 7 Press ENTER. Using the Sleep Timer You can set the system to turn off at a preset time, so you can fall asleep listening to music. You can preset the time in 10 minutes decrements. SLEEP The station name is stored. Press SLEEP. Each time you press this button, the minutes display (the remaining time) changes as follows: AUTO t 90MIN t 80MIN t 70MIN r R SLEEP OFF T 10MIN ..... 50MIN T 60MIN When you choose AUTO The system turns off when the current disc finishes playback (up to 240 minutes). The system turns off if you manually stop playing a disc. “AUTO” mode works only with functions such as DVD that is selected before setting to “AUTO.” To check the remaining time Press SLEEP once. You cannot check the remaining time if you select “AUTO.” To change the remaining time Press SLEEP repeatedly to select the desired time. To cancel the Sleep Timer function Press SLEEP repeatedly until “SLEEP OFF” appears in the front panel display. 80GB Changing the Brightness of the Front Panel Display You can change the brightness of the front panel display by two steps. Returning to the Default Settings You can return the system parameters such as speaker settings and preset stations, to the default settings. Z Press ., , or Z, on the system at the same time. “COLD RESET” appears in the front panel display and the default settings are returned. Other Operations C/X/x/c/ ENTER . AMP MENU With cover opened. 1 2 Press AMP MENU. Press x/X repeatedly until “CUSTOMIZE” appears in the front panel display, then press ENTER or c. The system enters the Customize Menu mode. 3 4 5 Press x/X repeatedly until “DIMMER” appears in the front panel display, then press ENTER or c. Press x/X to select the brightness of the front panel display. Press AMP MENU. Turns off the AMP menu. 81GB 2 Settings and Adjustments Using the Setup Display Press X/x to select the setup item from the displayed list: [LANGUAGE SETUP], [SCREEN SETUP], [CUSTOM SETUP], [SPEAKER SETUP], and [SETUP]. Then press ENTER or c. The selected Setup item appears. Example: [SCREEN SETUP] By using the Setup Display, you can make various adjustments to items, such as picture and sound. You can also set the subtitle language and the Setup Display, among other things. For details on each Setup Display item, see page 8389. For an overall list of Setup Display items, see page 109. SCREEN SETUP TV TYPE: SCREEN SAVER: BACKGROUND: COMPONENT OUT: 3 How to use the Setup Display 16:9 ON JACKET PICTURE INTERLACE Select an item using X/x, then press ENTER or c. The options for the selected item appear. Example: [TV TYPE] SCREEN SETUP TV TYPE: SCREEN SAVER: BACKGROUND: 16:9 4:3 LETTER BOX 4:3 PAN SCAN COMPONENT OUT: C/X/x/c/ ENTER O RETURN DVD SETUP Options Press C or O RETURN to return to setup items. 4 With cover opened. 1 In stop mode, press DVD SETUP. Select a setting using X/x, then press ENTER. The setting is selected and setup is complete. Example: [4:3 PAN SCAN] Selected setting The Setup Display appears. Main item LANGUAGE SETUP OSD : DVD MENU : AUDIO : SUBTITLE : ENGLISH ENGLISH ENGLISH ENGLISH SCREEN SETUP TV TYPE: SCREEN SAVER: BACKGROUND: 4:3 PAN SCAN ON JACKET PICTURE COMPONENT OUT: INTERLACE To turn off the Setup Display Press DVD SETUP repeatedly until the Setup Display is turned off. 82GB Setting the Display or Sound Track Language Settings for the Display (SCREEN SETUP) (LANGUAGE SETUP) [LANGUAGE SETUP] allows you to set various languages for the on-screen display or sound track. Select [LANGUAGE SETUP] in the Setup Display. For details on using the display, see “Using the Setup Display” (page 82). Select [SCREEN SETUP] in the Setup Display. For details on using the display, see “Using the Setup Display” (page 82). The default settings are underlined. SCREEN SETUP TV TYPE: SCREEN SAVER: BACKGROUND: COMPONENT OUT: ENGLISH ENGLISH ENGLISH ENGLISH 16:9 ON JACKET PICTURE INTERLACE x TV TYPE (DVD only) x OSD (On-Screen Display) Selects the aspect ratio of the connected TV (4:3 standard or wide). Selects the display language on the screen. Select the language from the displayed list. 16:9 Select this if you connect a widescreen TV or a TV with a wide mode function. 4:3 LETTER BOX Select this if you connect a 4:3 screen TV. Displays a wide picture with bands on the upper and lower portions of the screen. 4:3 PAN SCAN Select this if you connect a 4:3 screen TV. Automatically displays the wide picture on the entire screen and cuts off the portions that do not fit. x DVD MENU (DVD only) Selects the desired language for the DVD menu. Select the language from the displayed list. x AUDIO (DVD only) Selects the language of the sound track. Select the language from the displayed list. x SUBTITLE (DVD only) Selects the language of the subtitle. Select the language from the displayed list. Settings and Adjustments LANGUAGE SETUP OSD : DVD MENU : AUDIO : SUBTITLE : Choose settings according to the TV to be connected. Note If you select a language that is not recorded on the DVD, one of the recorded languages will be automatically selected (except for [OSD]). The default settings vary, depending on the country model. Tip If you select [OTHERS t] in [DVD MENU], [AUDIO], or [SUBTITLE], select and enter the language code from the list using the number buttons (page 108). After you have made a selection, the language code (4 digits) is displayed the next time you select [OTHERS t]. continued 83GB x COMPONENT OUT 16:9 This will change the type of signal output from the COMPONENT VIDEO OUT jacks on the system. See page 99, 100 for more information about the different types. 4:3 LETTER BOX INTERLACE Select this when you connect to a standard (interlace format) TV. PROGRESSIVE Select this when you have a TV that can accept progressive signals. 4:3 PAN SCAN To set to [PROGRESSIVE] 1 Note Depending on the DVD, [4:3 LETTER BOX] may be selected automatically instead of [4:3 PAN SCAN] or vice versa. SCREEN SETUP TV TYPE: 16:9 SCREEN SAVER: ON BACKGROUND: JACKET PICTURE COMPONENT OUT: INTERLACE PROGRESSIVE x SCREEN SAVER Turns the screen saver on and off so that the screen saver image appears when you leave the system in pause or stop mode for 15 minutes, or when you playback a CD, a Super Audio CD, an MP3, or JPEG file (except during the slide show) for more than 15 minutes. The screen saver will help prevent your display device from becoming damaged (afterimage). Press H to turn off the screen saver. ON Turns on the screen saver. OFF Turns off the screen saver. 2 SCREEN SETUP TV TYPE: 16:9 SCREEN SAVER: ON BACKGROUND: JACKET PICTURE COMPONENT OUT: Does your TV accept progressive signals? YES NO Selects the background color or picture on the TV screen in stop mode or while playing a CD. 84GB The jacket picture (still picture) appears in the background, but only if a jacket picture is already recorded on the disc (CDEXTRA, etc.). If the disc does not contain a jacket picture, the [GRAPHICS 1] picture appears. GRAPHICS 1-5 A preset picture stored in the system appears in the background. BLUE The background color is blue. BLACK The background color is black. Select [PROGRESSIVE] using X/x, then press ENTER. The display for confirming appears. x BACKGROUND JACKET PICTURE Select [COMPONENT OUT] in [SCREEN SETUP] using X/x, then press ENTER. 3 Select [YES] using X/x, then press ENTER. The type of output signal changes to progressive format. Notes • If your TV accepts progressive signals, connect COMPONENT VIDEO OUT of the system to the TV using a component video cord (not supplied), and set progressive format. • When [PROGRESSIVE] is selected in [SCREEN SETUP], no signal is output from the MONITOR OUT jacks. • If you set [COMPONENT OUT] in [SCREEN SETUP] to [PROGRESSIVE] even though your TV cannot accept the signal in progressive format, picture noise may appears. In this case, return the setting to interlace format (page 27). • The display for confirming does not appears when you select [INTERLACE]. Custom Settings (CUSTOM SETUP) Allows setting up Parental Control and other settings. Select [CUSTOM SETUP] in the Setup Display. For details on using the display, see “Using the Setup Display” (page 82). The default settings are underlined. x VCD COLOR SYSTEM (Asian, Australian, and Saudi Arabian models only) Select the color system when you play a VIDEO CD. AUTO Outputs the video signal in the system of the disc, either PAL or NTSC. If your TV uses a DUAL system, select AUTO. PAL Changes the video signal of an NTSC disc and outputs it in the PAL system. NTSC Changes the video signal of a PAL disc and outputs it in the NTSC system. Settings and Adjustments CUSTOM SETUP VCD COLOR SYSTEM PARENTAL CONTROL TRACK SELECTION OFF AUDIO DRC: OFF DATA CD PRIORITY: MP3 JPEG DATE: MM/DD/YYYY Notes • You cannot change the color system of the disc itself. • On Asian and Australian models, you can change the color system of this unit according to the connected TV (page 27). x PARENTAL CONTROL t (DVD only) Sets a password and playback limitation level for DVDs with playback limitation for children. For details, see “Limiting playback for children (Parental Control) (DVD only)” (page 69). continued 85GB x TRACK SELECTION (DVD only) x DATA CD PRIORITY (MP3, JPEG only) Gives the sound track having the highest number of channels priority when you play a DVD on which multiple audio formats (PCM, MPEG audio, DTS, or Dolby Digital format) are recorded. Set priority data you want to play, when you play a DATA CD (CD-ROM/CD-R/CD-RW) containing MP3 audio tracks and JPEG image files. OFF No priority given. AUTO Priority given. MP3 If an MP3 file exists on a disc, the system recognises the disc as an “MP3 Disc.” If only JPEG files exist on the disc, the system recognises the disc as a “JPEG Disc.” JPEG If a JPEG file exists on the disc, the system recognises the disc as a “JPEG Disc.” If only MP3 files exist on the disc, the system recognises the disc as an “MP3 Disc.” Notes • When you set the item to [AUTO], the language may change. The [TRACK SELECTION] setting has higher priority than the [AUDIO] settings in [LANGUAGE SETUP] (page 83). • If PCM, DTS, MPEG audio, and Dolby Digital sound tracks have the same number of channels, the system selects PCM, DTS, Dolby Digital, and MPEG audio sound tracks in this order. • Depending on the DVD, the audio channel with priority may be predetermined. In this case, you cannot give priority to the DTS, Dolby Digital, or MPEG audio format by selecting [AUTO]. x AUDIO DRC* Change the date information order of a JPEG image in the Control Menu. MM/DD/YYYY YYYY/MM/DD Narrows the DYNAMIC range of the sound track. Useful for watching movies at low volume late at night. * Dynamic Range Compression OFF No compression of DYNAMIC range. ON Reproduces the sound track with the kind of DYNAMIC range that the recording engineer intended. Note AUDIO DRC only applies to Dolby Digital sources. 86GB x JPEG DATE DD/MM/YYYY YYYY/DD/MM YYYY: Year MM: Month DD: Day Settings for the Speakers FRONT YES CENTER YES: Normally select this. NONE: Select this if no center speaker is used. SURROUND BEHIND: Select this if surround speakers are located in section B. SIDE: Select this if surround speakers are located in section A. NONE: Select this if no surround speaker is used. (SPEAKER SETUP) To obtain the best possible surround sound, set for the size of the speakers you have connected and their distance from your listening position. Then use the test tone to adjust the level and the balance of the speakers to the same level. Select [SPEAKER SETUP] in the Setup Display. For details, see “Using the Setup Display” (page 82). The default settings are underlined. SUBWOOFER YES Notes To return to the default setting when changing a setting • When you select an item, the sound cuts off for a moment. • Depending on the settings of other speakers, subwoofer may be excessive. Select the item, then press CLEAR. x DISTANCE x SIZE If you do not connect center or surround speakers, or move the surround speakers, set the parameters for [CENTER] and [SURROUND] and specify the surround speaker position and height. Since the front speaker and subwoofer settings are fixed, you cannot change them. If you connect the surround back speaker, set [SURROUND BACK] to [YES]. The default distance setting for the speakers in relation to the listening position is shown below. When you set the distance using the Quick Setup (page 34), the settings is automatically displayed. Settings and Adjustments SPEAKER SETUP SIZE: DISTANCE: LEVEL: BALANCE: TEST TONE: SURROUND NONE: Normally select this. BACK YES: Select this if the surround back (appears except speaker is used. when you set [SURROUND] to [NONE] in the [SIZE] setting.) 1.6m 1.6m 1.6m Position diagram 1.6m 1.6m 1.6m 90 A A 45 B B 20 continued 87GB Be sure to change the value in the Setup Display when you move the speakers. FRONT 1.6 m* Front speaker distance from the listening position can be set in 0.2 meter increments from 1.0 to 7.0 meters. CENTER 1.6 m* (appears when you set [CENTER] to [YES] in the [SIZE] setting.) Center speaker distance can be moved up to 1.6 meters closer to the listening position from the front speaker distance, in 0.2 meter increments. SURROUND 1.6 m* (appears except when you set [SURROUND] to [NONE] in the [SIZE] setting.) Surround speaker distance can be moved up to 4.6 meters closer to the listening position from the front speaker distance, in 0.2 meter increments. SURROUND BACK 1.6 m (appears when you set [SURROUD BACK] to [YES] in the [SIZE] setting.) Surround back speaker distance can be moved up to 4.6 meters closer to the listening position from the front speaker distance, in 0.2 meter increments. * When you perform the Quick Setup (page 34), the default settings are changed. Notes • When you set the distance, the sound cuts off for a moment. • If all front and surround speakers are not placed at an equal distance from your listening position, set the distance according to the closest speaker. • Do not place the surround speakers farther away from your listening position than the front speakers. • Depending on the input stream, the [DISTANCE] setting may not be effective. 88GB x LEVEL You can vary the level of each speaker as follows. Be sure to set [TEST TONE] to [ON] for easy adjustment. CENTER 0 dB* (appears when you set [CENTER] to [YES] in the [SIZE] setting.) Adjusts the level of the center speaker (–6 dB to +6 dB, 1 dB increments). SURROUND Adjusts the level of the surround LEFT 0 dB* speakers (–6 dB to +6 dB, 1 dB SURROUND increments). RIGHT 0 dB* (appears except when you set [SURROUND] to [NONE] in the [SIZE] setting.) SURROUND Adjusts the level of the surround BACK back speaker (–10 dB to +10 dB, 0 dB 1 dB increments). (appears when you set [SURROUND BACK] to [YES] in the [SIZE] setting.) SUBWOOFER Adjusts the level of the subwoofer +4 dB* (–6 dB to +6 dB, 1 dB increments). * When you perform the Quick Setup (page 34), the default settings are changed. x BALANCE You can vary the balance of the left and right speakers as follows. Be sure to set [TEST TONE] to [ON] for easy adjustment. FRONT (CENTER) Adjusts the balance between the front left and right speakers. The center position is shown as “---.” (You can adjust from the center 6 steps to left or right.) Adjusting the speaker balance and level by using the test tone 1 The Setup Display appears. 2 To adjust the volume of all the speakers at one time 3 Use the VOLUME control on the system, or press VOL +/–. 4 The test tone is not emitted from the speakers. ON The test tone is emitted from both left and right speakers simultaneously while adjusting balance. When you select one of the [SPEAKER SETUP] items, the test tone is emitted from each speaker in sequence. Press X/x repeatedly to select [TEST TONE], then press ENTER or c. Press X/x repeatedly to select [ON], then press ENTER. 5 From your listening position, adjust the value of [BALANCE] and [LEVEL] using C/X/x/c. When selecting [BALANCE], the test tone is emitted from both left and right speakers simultaneously. When selecting [LEVEL], the test tone is emitted from only the speaker which you are adjusting. 6 7 8 Settings and Adjustments OFF Press X/x repeatedly to select [SPEAKER SETUP], then press ENTER or c. You will hear the test tone from each speaker in sequence. x TEST TONE The speakers will emit a test tone to adjust [LEVEL] and [BALANCE]. Press DVD SETUP in stop mode. Press ENTER when you have finished making adjustments. Press X/x repeatedly to select [TEST TONE], then press ENTER. Press X/x repeatedly to select [OFF], then press ENTER. Notes • When you adjust the speaker settings, the sound cuts off for a moment. • The surround back speaker level can be also adjusted on the amplifier that is connected to the surround back speaker. Tip To adjust the balance or the level without listening to the test tone, select [BALANCE] or [LEVEL] in step 3 and press ENTER. Then adjust the balance or level using X/x and press ENTER. continued 89GB Setting the speakers by using the front panel display on the system CUSTOMIZE DUAL MONO You can set the speakers by using the AMP menu that is displayed in the front panel display. SB DEC* AMP menu list DIMMER SP SETUP CENTER SP SURR SP SURR B SPa) CENTER Y CENTER N SURR Y SURR N * MAIN SUB MAIN+SUB MAIN/SUB SB MATRIX SB AUTO SB OFF DIM OFF DIM ON This setting appears when you set “SURR SP” to “SURR Y” and “SURR B SP” to “SURR B Y” in “SP SETUP.” SURR B N SURR B Y 1.0 m - 7.0 m 1.0 m - 7.0 m SURR DISTb) 1.0 m - 7.0 m 1.0 m - 7.0 m SB DISTb) F DIST CEN DISTb) SP POSb) SP BEHIND SP SIDE C/X/x/c/ ENTER LEVEL TESTTONE F BALANCE T.TONE OFF T.TONE ON 6 steps left or right AMP MENU CEN LEVELb) –6 dB - +6 dB LEVELb) –6 dB - +6 dB SR LEVELb) –6 dB - +6 dB SB LEVELb) SW LEVEL –10 dB - +10 dB –6 dB - +6 dB AUDIO DRC DRC OFF DRC ON SL With cover opened. 1 2 a) Press AMP MENU. Press X/x repeatedly until the item you want to set appears in the front panel display. xSP SETUP This setting appears when you set “SURR SP” to “SURR Y” in “SP SETUP.” b) This setting appears when you set the corresponding speaker to “Y” in “SP SETUP.” Sets the speaker size, distance, and place. xLEVEL Sets the balance and level of the each speaker, and turns on/off the test tone. 3 4 Press ENTER or c. Press X/x to select the desired item, then press ENTER or c. To set the item, press X/x, then press ENTER or AMP MENU. You can set the following items. The default settings are underlined. 90GB xSP SETUP xLEVEL CENTER Y: Select this if you use a center speaker. CENTER N: Select this if no center speaker is used. SURR SP (surround speakers) SURR Y: Select this if you use surround speakers. SURR N: Select this if no surround speaker is used. SURR B SPa) (surround back speaker) SURR B N: Select this if no surround back speaker is used. SURR B Y: Select this if you use a surround back speaker. F DIST (front distance) 1.6mb) Front speaker distance from the listening position can be set in 0.2 meter increments from 1.0 to 7.0 meters. CEN DISTc) (center distance) 1.6mb) Center speaker distance can be moved up to 1.6 meters closer to the listening position from the front speaker distance, in 0.2 meter increments. SURR DISTc) (surround distance) 1.6mb) Surround speaker distance can be moved up to 4.6 meters closer to the listening position from the front speaker distance, in 0.2 meter increments. SB DISTc) (surround back distance) 1.6mb) Surround back speaker distance can be moved up to 4.6 meters closer to the listening position from the front speaker distance, in 0.2 meter increments. SP POSc) (surround speakers position) SP BEHIND: Select this if surround speakers are located in the back area of the listening position. SP SIDE: Select this if surround speakers are located in the side area of the listening position. a) This setting appears when you set “SURR SP” to “SURR Y” in “SP SETUP.” b) When you perform the Quick Setup (page 34), the default settings are changed. c) This setting appears when you set the corresponding speaker to “Y” in “SP SETUP” (page 91). TEST TONE (test tone) T. TONE OFF: The test tone is not emitted from the speakers. T. TONE ON: The test tone is emitted from both left and right speakers simultaneously while adjusting balance. When you select one of the “LEVEL” items, the test tone is emitted from each speaker in sequence. F BALANCE (front balance) 0 Adjusts the balance between the front left and right speakers. (You can adjust from the center 6 steps left (L6) or right (R6).) CEN LEVELb) Adjusts the level of the center (center level) speaker (–6 dB to +6 dB, 1 dB 0a) increments). SL LEVELb) (surround left level) 0a) Adjusts the left level of the surround speaker (–6 dB to +6 dB, 1 dB increments). SR LEVELb) (surround right level) 0a) Adjusts the right level of the surround speaker (–6 dB to +6 dB, 1 dB increments). SB LEVELb) (surround back level) 0a) Adjusts the level of the surround back speaker (–10 dB to +10 dB, 1 dB increments). SW LEVEL (subwoofer level) +4a) Adjusts the level of the subwoofer (–6 dB to +6 dB, 1 dB increments). Settings and Adjustments CENTER SP (center speaker) AUDIO DRC DRC OFF: No compression of (dynamic DYNAMIC range. compression) DRC ON: Reproduces the sound track with the kind of DYNAMIC range that the recording engineer intended. a) When you perform the Quick Setup (page 34), the default settings are changed. b) This setting appears when you set the corresponding speaker to “Y” in “SP SETUP” (page 91). continued 91GB xCUSTOMIZE DUAL MONO (dual mono) SB DEC* (surround back decoding) DIMMER (dimmer) * MAIN SUB MAIN+SUB MAIN/SUB For details, see “Enjoying Multiplex Broadcast Sound (DUAL MONO)” on page 76. SB MATRIX SB AUTO SB OFF For details, see “Selecting the Surround Back Decoding Mode” on page 62. DIM OFF DIM ON For details, see “Changing the Brightness of the Front Panel Display” on page 81. This setting appears when you set “SURR SP” to “SURR Y” and “SURR B SP” to “SURR B Y” in “SP SETUP.” Quick Setup and Resetting the System (SETUP) Select [SETUP] in the setup display. For details, see “Using the Setup Display” (page 82). SETUP QUICK RESET x QUICK Normally, when you turn the system on for the first time or after resetting the system, the guide message appears on the TV screen and you can perform the Quick Setup. If you cancelled the Quick Setup and you want to perform the Quick Setup again, operate on this screen. See “How to use the Quick Setup” on page 34. Note After performing the Quick Setup, the settings of following items are changed. – [OSD], [DVD MENU], and [SUBTITLE] in [LANGUAGE SETUP] – [DISTANCE] and [LEVEL] in [SPEAKER SETUP] – [TV TYPE] in [SCREEN SETUP] x RESET You can reset the system. After you select [RESET] and press ENTER, select [YES] to reset the settings (it takes a few seconds to complete). Select [NO] and press ENTER to cancel. Do not press "/1, when resetting the system. Notes • When you select [RESET], all the settings return to the default. • When you turn the system on after resetting, the guide message appears on the TV screen. To perform the Quick Setup (page 34), press ENTER, to return to normal screen, press CLEAR. 92GB Additional Information Troubleshooting If you experience any of the following difficulties while using the system, use this troubleshooting guide to help remedy the problem before requesting repairs. Should any problem persist, consult your nearest Sony dealer. Power The power is not turned on. • Check that the AC power cord (mains lead) is connected securely. The POWER/ON LINE indicator does not turn on. • The + and – speaker cords are short-circuited. In this case, disconnect the AC power cord (mains lead) of the surround amplifier from the wall outlet (mains), reconnect, and then turn the surround amplifier on. Picture There is no picture. • The video connecting cords are not connected securely. • The video connecting cords are damaged. • The system is not connected to the correct TV input jack (page 25). • The video input on the TV is not set so that you can view pictures from the system. Picture noise appears. • The disc is dirty or flawed. • If the picture output from your system goes through your VCR to get to your TV, the copyprotection signal applied to some DVD programs could affect picture quality. If you still experience problems even when you connect your system directly to your TV, try connecting your system to your TV’s S video input (page 25). Even though you set the aspect ratio in [TV TYPE] of [SCREEN SETUP], the picture does not fill the screen. • The aspect ratio on the disc is fixed. The picture is black and white. • Depending on the TV, the picture on the screen becomes black and white when you play a disc recorded in the NTSC color system. Additional Information The STANDBY indicator flashes. Immediately unplug the power cord and check the following items. • Are the + and – speaker cords short-circuited? • Are you using only the specified speakers? • Is anything blocking the ventilation holes on the top of the system? • Is the subwoofer connected incorrectly? After checking the above items and fixing any problems, connect the power cord again and turn on the system. If the indicator still flashes, or if the cause of the problem cannot be found even after checking all the above items, consult your nearest Sony dealer. • You have set [COMPONENT OUT] in [SCREEN SETUP] to [PROGRESSIVE] even though your TV cannot accept the signal in progressive format. In this case, return the setting to interlace format (page 27). • Even if your TV is compatible with progressive format (480p) signals, the image may be affected when you set [COMPONENT OUT] to [PROGRESSIVE]. In this case, set [COMPONENT OUT] to [INTERLACE] (page 84). • When [PROGRESSIVE] is selected in [SCREEN SETUP], no signal is output from the MONITOR OUT or S VIDEO OUT jacks. Sound There is no sound. • The speaker cord is not connected securely. • Press MUTING on the remote if “MUTING ON” is displayed in the front panel display. • The system is in pause mode or in Slow-motion Play mode. Press H to return to normal play mode. • Fast forward or fast reverse is performed. Press H to return to normal play mode. • Check the speaker settings (pages 36, 87). The left and right sounds are unbalanced or reversed. • Check that the speakers and components are connected correctly and securely. • Adjust the balance parameter in the [BALANCE] menu (page 89). continued 93GB There is no sound from the subwoofer. • Check the speaker connections and settings (pages 36, 87). • Set the sound field to “AUTO FORMAT DIRECT AUTO” (page 58). Severe hum or noise is heard. • Check that the speakers and components are connected securely. • Check that the connecting cords are away from a transformer or motor, and at least 3 meters away from your TV set or a fluorescent light. • Move your TV away from the audio components. • The plugs and jacks are dirty. Wipe them with a cloth slightly moistened with alcohol. • Clean the disc. The sound loses stereo effect when you play a VIDEO CD, a CD, or an MP3. • Set [AUDIO] to [STEREO] in the Control Menu display (page 56). • Make sure the system is connected appropriately. The surround effect is difficult to hear when you are playing a Dolby Digital, DTS, or MPEG audio sound track. • Make sure the sound field function is on (page 58). • Check the speaker connections and settings (pages 36, 87). • Depending on the DVD, the output signal may not be the entire 5.1 channel. It may be monaural or stereo even if the sound track is recorded in Dolby Digital or MPEG audio format. The sound comes from the center speaker only. • Depending on the disc, the sound may come from the center speaker only. No sound is heard from the center speaker. • Check the speaker connections and settings. • Make sure the sound field function is on (page 58). • Depending on the source, the effect of the center speaker may be less noticeable. No sound or only a very low-level sound is heard from the surround speakers. • Check the speaker connections and settings. • Make sure the sound field function is on (page 58). • Select a sound field containing the word “C. ST. EX” (page 60). • Depending on the source, the effect of the surround speakers may be less noticeable. 94GB • Wireless setting of the surround speaker is not correct (page 29). • The plasma display may interfere with transmission, in which case, adjust the position of the IR transmitter and IR receiver of the surround amplifier (or IR receiver) (page 29). • Do not install the surround amplifier (or IR receiver) in a place exposed to direct sunlight or strong light such as an incandescent lamp. • Clean the surface of the IR transmitter and IR receiver of the surround amplifier (or IR receiver). Operation Radio stations cannot be tuned in. • Check that the antennas (aerials) are connected securely. Adjust the antennas (aerials) or connect an external antenna (aerial) if necessary. • The signal strength of the stations is too weak (when tuning in with automatic tuning). Use direct tuning. • No stations have been preset or the preset stations have been cleared (when tuning by scanning preset stations). Preset the stations (page 77). • Press DISPLAY so that the frequency appears in the display. The remote does not function. • There are obstacles between the remote and the system. • The distance between the remote and the system is too far. • The remote is not pointed at the remote sensor on the system. • The batteries in the remote are weak. The POWER/ON LINE indicator momentarily turns red. • When playing an MP3 or DVD disc, or when changing a disc, the indicator momentarily turns red. This is not a malfunction. The POWER/ON LINE indicator flashes in red. • Move the wireless system away from any other nearby wireless system(s). • Point the IR transmitter at the IR receiver of the surround amplifier (or IR receiver). The disc does not play. • There is no disc inserted. • The disc is upside down. Insert the disc with the playback side facing down on the disc tray. • The disc is skewed in the system. • The system cannot play CD-ROMs, etc. (page 7). • The region code on the DVD does not match the system. • Moisture has condensed inside the system. Remove the disc and leave the system turned on for about half an hour (page 2). The MP3 audio track cannot be played. • The DATA CD is not recorded in an MP3 format that conforms to ISO9660 Level 1/ Level 2 or Joliet. • The MP3 audio track does not have the extension “.MP3.” • The data is not formatted in MP3 even though it has the extension “.MP3.” • The system can only play MP3 (MPEG1 Audio Layer3) audio. • Set [DATA CD PRIORITY] to [MP3] in the [CUSTOM SETUP] setting (page 86). • Directory level is more than 8. • The disc contains more than 99 albums (the maximum number of MP3 audio tracks that can be contained on an album is 250). The display for entering the password does not appear for Super Audio CD, even though Custom Parental Control is set. • Custom Parental Control is set for different layers of a Super Audio CD. The JPEG image file cannot be played. • The DATA CD is not recorded in an JPEG format that conforms to ISO9660 Level 1/ Level 2 or Joliet. • The JPEG image file does not have the extension “.JPG” or “.JPEG.” • The data is not formatted in JPEG even though it has the extension “.JPG” or “.JPEG.” • Image length or width is more than 4720 dots. • Set [DATA CD PRIORITY] to [JPEG] in the [CUSTOM SETUP] setting (page 86). • Directory level is more than 8. • You cannot play the Progressive JPEG files. • A JPEG image file with a high width to length ratio cannot be played. • The disc contains more than 99 albums (the maximum number of JPEG image files that can be contained on an album is 250). A disc does not start playing from the beginning. • Program Play, Shuffle Play, or Repeat Play has been selected (pages 45, 47, 48). • Resume Play has been selected. During stop, press x on the system or the remote and then start playback (page 39). • The title, DVD or PBC menu automatically appears on the TV screen. The system starts playing the disc automatically. • The DVD features an auto playback function. Playback stops automatically. • Some discs may contain an auto pause signal. While playing such a disc, the system stops playback at the auto pause signal. The system turns off during DVD playback. • If approximately one hour passes with DVD playback paused or with the DVD top menu or a DVD menu displayed during DVD playback, the system automatically turns off. You cannot perform some functions such as Stop, Search, Slow-motion Play, Repeat Play, Shuffle Play, or Program Play. • Depending on the disc, you may not be able to perform some of the operations above. See the operating manual that came with the disc. Additional Information The title of the MP3 audio album or track is not correctly displayed. • The system can only display alphabetical letters and numbers. Other characters are displayed as “ ”. The title of the JPEG album or file is not correctly displayed. • The system can only display alphabetical letters and numbers. Other characters are displayed as “ ”. Messages do not appear on the screen in the language you want. • In the Setup Display, select the desired language for the on-screen display in [OSD] under [LANGUAGE SETUP] (page 83). The language for the sound track cannot be changed. • Multilingual tracks are not recorded on the DVD being played. • The DVD prohibits changing the language for the sound track. The subtitle language cannot be changed. • Multilingual subtitles are not recorded on the DVD being played. • The DVD prohibits changing the subtitles. The subtitle cannot be turned off. • The DVD prohibits turning off subtitles. continued 95GB The angles cannot be changed. • Multi-angles are not recorded on the DVD being played (page 65). • The DVD prohibits changing the angles. A disc cannot be ejected and “LOCKED” appears in the front panel display. • Contact your Sony dealer or local authorized Sony service facility. Specifications Amplifier section Stereo mode (rated) Surround mode (reference) music power output “C-32” appears in the front panel display. • Turn the power off and then on again by pressing [/1 on the system. 65 W + 65 W (4 ohms at 1 kHz, DIN) Front: 100 W + 100 W (with SS-TS20) Center*: 100 W (with SS-CT44) Surround*: 100 W + 100 W (with SS-TS23) Subwoofer*: 100 W × 2 (with SS-WS12) “CANNOT LOCK” appears in the front panel display. • Turn the power off and then on again by pressing [/1 on the system, then perform “On moving the system” (page 3). If “CANNOT LOCK” still appears in the front panel display, contact your Sony dealer or local authorized Sony service facility. * Depending on the sound field settings and the source, The system does not work normally. • Disconnect the AC power cord (mains lead) from the wall outlet (mains), then reconnect after several minutes. Output there may be no sound output. Inputs VIDEO/SAT: Sensitivity: 250 mV/ 450 mV Impedance: 50 kilohms Phones SURROUND BACK Voltage: 2V Impedance: 1 kilohms Accepts low-and highimpedance headphones. Super Audio CD/DVD system Laser Semiconductor laser (Super Audio CD/DVD: λ = 650 nm) (CD: λ = 780 nm) Emission duration: continuous Signal format system NTSC or NTSC/PAL Frequency response (at 2 CH STEREO mode) DVD (PCM): 2 Hz to 22 kHz (±1.0 dB) Harmonic distortion 96GB CD: 2 Hz to 20 kHz (±1.0 dB) Less than 0.03 % Tuner section System FM tuner section Tuning range Antenna (aerial) Antenna (aerial) terminals Intermediate frequency AM tuner section Tuning range Middle Easten models: Other models: Antenna (aerial) Intermediate frequency Surround PLL quartz-locked digital synthesizer system 87.5 – 108.0 MHz (50 kHz step) FM wire antenna (aerial) 75 ohms, unbalanced 10.7 MHz 531 – 1,602 kHz (with the interval set at 9 kHz) 531 – 1,602 kHz (with the interval set at 9 kHz) 530 – 1,710 kHz (with the interval set at 10 kHz) AM loop antenna (aerial) 450 kHz Outputs Mass (approx.) Mass (approx.) Speaker system Speaker unit Rated impedance Dimensions (approx.) Mass (approx.) Power requirements Taiwan model: Other models: Power consumption PB/CB, PR/CR: 0.7 Vp-p 75 ohms Surround amplifier Bass reflex 70 mm dia. cone type 4 ohms 90 × 221 × 75 mm (w/h/d) 0.7 kg Bass reflex 160 mm dia. cone type × 2 4 ohms 201 × 368 × 448 mm (w/h/d) 9.5 kg General System Dimensions (approx.) Mass (approx.) Power requirements Taiwan model: Other models: Power consumption Dimensions (approx.) 120 V AC, 50/60 Hz 220 – 240 V AC, 50/60 Hz 90 W 0.3 W (at the Power Saving mode) 430 × 60 × 385 mm (w/h/d) incl. projecting parts 4.7 kg Mass (approx.) 120 V AC, 50/60 Hz 220 – 240 V AC, 50/60 Hz 36 W 386 × 108 × 85 mm (w/h/d) incl. projecting parts 3.3 kg Supplied accessories See page 11. Design and specifications are subject to change without notice. Center Speaker system Speaker unit Rated impedance Dimensions (approx.) Subwoofer Video: 1 Vp-p 75 ohms S video: Y: 1 Vp-p 75 ohms C: 0.286 Vp-p 75 ohms COMPONENT: Y: 1 Vp-p 75 ohms Speakers Front Speaker system Speaker unit Rated impedance Dimensions (approx.) Mass (approx.) Bass reflex 70 mm dia. cone type 4 ohms 90 × 224 × 75 mm (w/h/d) 0.73 kg Additional Information Video section Speaker system Speaker unit Rated impedance Dimensions (approx.) Bass reflex 70 mm dia. cone type 4 ohms 356 × 92 × 76 mm (w/h/d) 0.9 kg 97GB Dolby Digital Glossary Album Section of a music piece or an image on a data CD containing MP3 audio tracks or JPEG files. Chapter Subdivision of a title on a DVD. A title is composed of several chapters. Digital Cinema Sound (DCS) This is the generic name of the surround sound produced by digital signal processing technology developed by Sony. Unlike previous surround sound fields mainly directed at the reproduction of music, Digital Cinema Sound is designed specifically for the enjoyment of movies. Digital Infrared Audio Transmission Recent times have been witness to the rapid spread of DVDs, Digital Broadcasting Satellite Receiver and other high-quality media. In order to ensure that the subtle nuances endowed by these high-quality media would be transmitted with no accompanying deterioration, Sony developed a technology called “Digital Infrared Audio Transmission” for the infrared transmission of digital audio signals using no compression, and it introduced it into the DAVSR1W. This technology transfers digital audio signals using no compression inside the subcarrier frequency band allocated by the IEC (International Electronic Committee) and JEITA (Japan Electronics and Information Technology Industries Association) for hi-fi audio transmission applications. (See Fig. 1) Analog transmission L 2 Digital transmission (Digital infrared Audio Transmission) R 3 4 5 6 [MHz] Fig. 1 Signal spectrum for digital infrared audio transmission 98GB This movie theater sound format is more advanced than Dolby Surround Pro Logic. In this format, the surround speakers output stereo sound with an expanded frequency range, and a subwoofer channel for deep bass is independently provided. This format is also called “5.1,” with the subwoofer channel designated as the 0.1 channel (since it functions only when a deep bass effect is needed). All six channels in this format are recorded separately for superior channel separation. Furthermore, since all the signals are processed digitally, less signal degradation occurs. Dolby Digital EX An enhanced compatible format of Dolby Digital 5.1, developed by Dolby Laboratories and Lucasfilm THX, which adds an extra surround back channel, and can be used for 6.1(three surround speakers) channel playback, using matrix encoding. Dolby Pro Logic II Dolby Pro Logic II creates five full-bandwidth output channels from two-channel sources. This is done using an advanced, high-purity matrix surround decoder that extracts the spatial properties of the original recording without adding any new sounds or tonal colorations. x Movie mode The Movie mode is for use with stereo television shows and all programs encoded in Dolby Surround. The result is enhanced sound field directionality that approaches the quality of discrete 5.1-channel sound. x Music mode The Music mode is for use with any stereo music recordings, and provides a wide and deep sound space. Dolby Surround Pro Logic As one method of decoding Dolby Surround, Dolby Surround Pro Logic produces four channels from two-channel sound. Compared with the former Dolby Surround system, Dolby Surround Pro Logic reproduces left-to-right panning more naturally and localizes sounds more precisely. To take full advantage of Dolby Surround Pro Logic, you should have one pair of surround speakers and a center speaker. The surround speakers output monaural sound. DTS DTS-ES An enhanced compatible format of 5.1 channel, which adds an extra surround back channel. There are two formats: Discrete 6.1, which processes the surround back signal independently, and Matrix 6.1, which processes it along with the Surround (L/R) channels. DVD A disc that contains up to 8 hours of moving pictures even though its diameter is the same as a CD. The data capacity of a single-layer and singlesided DVD, at 4.7 GB (Giga Byte), is 7 times that of a CD. Furthermore, the data capacity of a dual-layer and single-sided DVD is 8.5 GB, a single-layer and double-sided DVD 9.4 GB, and a dual-layer and double-sided DVD 17 GB. The picture data uses the MPEG 2 format, one of a worldwide standard of digital compression technology. The picture data is compressed to about 1/40 of its original size. DVD also uses variable rate coding technology that processes allocated data according to the status of the picture. The audio data is recorded in Dolby Digital as well as in PCM, allowing you to enjoy more realistic audio presence. File Section of a picture on a data CD containing JPEG image files. Film based software, Video based software DVDs can be classified as Film based or Video based software. Film based DVDs contain the same images (24 frames per second) that are shown at movie theaters. Video based DVDs, such as television dramas or sit-coms, displays images at 30 frames (or 60 fields) per second. Index (Super Audio CD, CD)/Video Index (VIDEO CD) A number that divides a track into sections to easily locate the point you want on a VIDEO CD, Super Audio CD, or CD. Depending on the disc, no indexes may be recorded. Interlace format (Interlaced scanning) The Interlace format is the NTSC standard method for displaying TV images at 30 frames per second. Each frame is scanned twice alternately between the even numbered scanning lines and then odd numbered scanning lines, at 60 times per second. Additional Information Digital audio compression technology developed by Digital Theater Systems, Inc. This technology conforms to 5.1-channel surround. This format comprises of stereo rear channels and a discrete subwoofer channel. DTS provides the same 5.1 discrete channels of high quality digital audio. The good channel separation is realized due to all channel data being recorded discretely and processed digitally. Furthermore, various advanced functions such as the multi-angle, multilingual, and Parental Control functions are provided with the DVD. Multi-angle function Various angles of a scene, or viewpoints of the video camera are recorded on some DVDs. Multilingual function Several languages for the sound or subtitles in a picture are recorded on some DVDs. continued 99GB Neo:6 Scene Developed by Digital Theater Systems, Inc., applies a conventional 2-channel or Dolby Digital source signal to a high-precision, digital matrix decoder to achieve 6.1 channel surround playback. CINEMA mode allows for more separation of channels to enhance the 6.1 channel effect, and is best suited for movies. MUSIC mode allows the front L and R channels to go unprocessed for optimum stereo, with the addition of the surround components adding a special quality to the sound. On a VIDEO CD with PBC (playback control) functions, the menu screens, moving pictures and still pictures are divided into sections called “scenes.” Parental Control A function of the DVD to limit playback of the disc by the age of the users according to the limitation level in each country. The limitation varies from disc to disc; when it is activated, playback is completely prohibited, violent scenes are skipped or replaced with other scenes and so on. Playback Control (PBC) Signals encoded on VIDEO CDs (Version 2.0) to control playback. By using menu screens recorded on VIDEO CDs with PBC functions, you can enjoy playing simple interactive programs, programs with search functions, and so on. Progressive format (sequential scanning) In contrast to the Interlace format, the progressive format can reproduce 60 frames per second by reproducing all scanning lines (525 lines for the NTSC system). The overall picture quality increases and still images, text and horizontal lines appear sharper. This format is compatible with the 525 progressive format. Region Code This system is used to protect copyrights. A region number is allocated on each DVD system or DVD disc according to the sales region. Each region code is shown on the system as well as on the disc packaging. The system can play the discs that match its region code. The system can also play discs with the “ ALL ” mark. Even when the region code is not shown on the DVD, the region limit may still be activated. 100GB Super Audio CD A Super Audio CD disc can reproduce sounds that are extremely faithful to the original sound by use of DSD (Direct Stream Digital) technology. This technology utilizes a sampling frequency of 2.8224 MHz, which is 64 times that of a conventional CD, and 1-bit quantization that enables the disc to hold 4 times the amount of information that a standard PCM format CD can hold. Super Audio CDs are divided into the following types. • Super Audio CD (single layer disc) This disc consists of a single HD layer*. * High density signal layer for the Super Audio CD HD (high density) layer • Super Audio CD (dual layer disc) This disc consists of dual HD layers and is capable of extended play over long periods. Also, as the dual layer disc consists of dual HD layers on one side only, you do not have to turn the disc over during playback. HD layer HD layer • Super Audio CD + CD (Hybrid disc) This disc consists of an HD layer and a CD layer. Also, as the dual layers are on one side only, you do not have to turn the disc over during playback. You can play this CD layer using a conventional CD player. CD layer HD layer • 2 channel + Multi-channel Super Audio CD This disc consists of a 2 channel playback area and a multi-channel playback area. 2 channel playback area Multi-channel playback area Title The longest section of a picture or music feature on a DVD, movie, etc., in video software, or the entire album in audio software. Track Section of a picture or a music piece on a Super Audio CD, CD, VIDEO CD or MP3. An album is composed of several tracks (MP3 only). VIDEO CD Additional Information A compact disc that contains moving pictures. The picture data uses the MPEG 1 format, one of a worldwide standard of digital compression technology. The picture data is compressed to about 1/140 of its original size. Consequently, a 12 cm VIDEO CD can contain up to 74 minutes of moving pictures. VIDEO CDs also contain compact audio data. Sounds outside the range of human hearing are compressed while sounds we can hear are not compressed. VIDEO CDs can hold 6 times the audio information of conventional audio CDs. There are 2 versions of VIDEO CDs. • Version 1.1: You can play only moving pictures and sounds. • Version 2.0: You can play high-resolution still pictures and enjoy PBC functions. This system conforms to both versions. 101GB Index to Parts and Controls For more information, refer to the pages indicated in parentheses. Front Panel A [/1 (power) switch/STANDBY indicator (37) 102GB F VOLUME +/– (37, 89) G ./> (38, 40) B Disc slot (37) H x (stop) (38) C I (remote sensor) (11) (play/pause) (37) D Front panel display (103) J FUNCTION (37, 76, 78) E PHONES (on the side of the system) jack (37) K Z (eject) (37) Front Panel Display When playing back a DVD Playing status Current mode Current sound effect Current chapter number TITLE CHAP NIGHT DSGX REP 1 D EX PL DTS –ES Current title number Current sound Playing time Playing time Playing status Current mode Current sound effect Current track number PGM SHUF REP 1 MP3 SA– CD MULTI PBC TRK NIGHT DSGX PL DTS –ES NEO:6 Lights up during PBC playback (VIDEO CD only) Additional Information When playing back a Super Audio CD, CD, VIDEO CD (without PBC functions), or MP3 Current sound (CD, VIDEO CD, or MP3 only) Lights up during MULTI channel playback area (Super Audio CD only) When listening to the radio Monaural/Stereo effect TUNED ST Current band Preset number Sound effect MONO NIGHT DSGX kHz MHz Current station continued 103GB When playing back a JPEG file Playing status JPEG 104GB Current file number Rear Panel VIDEO SPEAKER FRONT R CENTER R FRONT L AUDIO IN Y PB/CB PR/CR L S VIDEO (DVD ONLY) OPTICAL DIGITAL IN AM FM 75 COAXIAL DIR-T1 SURROUND R BACK WOOFER WOOFER COMPOMEMT VIDEO OUT AUDIO IN SAT L SAT VIDEO MONITOR OUT G FM 75Ω COAXIAL jack (23) B SURROUND BACK jack (20) C VIDEO AUDIO IN (L/R) jacks (25) H MONITOR OUT (VIDEO/S VIDEO) jacks (25) D COMPONENT VIDEO OUT jacks (25) I SAT AUDIO IN (L/R) jacks (25) E SAT OPTICAL DIGITAL IN jack (26) J DIR-T1 jack (17) F AM terminals (23) Additional Information A SPEAKER jacks (17) continued 105GB B DISPLAY (52, 54, 78) Remote C SLEEP (80) D ./>, PRESET –/+ (38, 40, 78, 79) E H (play) (37, 38, 39, 40, 44, 45, 47, 48, 49) F DVD TOP MENU/ALBUM– (40, 42, 43) G C/X/x/c/ENTER (34, 40, 40, 42, 43, 45, 45, 47, 48, 50, 56, 62, 65, 66, 67, 69, 76, 77, 79, 81, 82, 90) H DVD DISPLAY (42, 43, 47, 48, 50, 54, 55, 56, 65, 66, 67) I AUTO FORMAT DIRECT (58, 59) J DSGX (64) K DVD SETUP (34, 69, 82) L SUBTITLE (66) M AUDIO (56) N ANGLE (65) O Number buttons (34, 40, 40, 45, 50, 65, 67, 69, 72, 74) P ENTER Q TUNER MENU (77, 79) R TV [/1 (on/standby) (72) S "/1 (standby) (34, 37, 78) T SONY TV DIRECT (74) U TUNER/BAND (77, 78, 79) V FUNCTION (34, 37, 76, 78, 79) Open the cover. W m/M/ / 49, 77, 78) SLOW, TUNING –/+ (44, X x (stop) (38, 39, 40, 67, 78) Y X (pause) (38) Z MUTING (38) wj DVD MENU/ALBUM+ (40, 42, 43) wk VOL +/– (38, 78) wl O RETURN (34, 40, 42, 43, 45, 50, 67, 69, 82) e; MODE (59, 60) ea NIGHT MODE (64) es PLAY MODE (45, 47) ed REPEAT (45, 48) ef TV (72, 74) eg TV/VIDEO (72, 74) Note This remote control glows in the dark. However, before glowing, the remote must be exposed to light for awhile. A Z (eject) (37, 38) 106GB eh TV CH +/– (72, 74) ej TV VOL +/– (72) ek AMP MENU (62, 76, 81, 90) el CLEAR (34, 45, 50) r; FM MODE (78) Surround Amplifier Front panel Rear panel SURROUND L SPEAKER SPEAKER SURROUND R POWER/ON LINE DIR-R2 A POWER switch (29) B POWER/ON LINE indicator (29) C IR receiver (29) E DIR-R2 jack (30) F SPEAKER SURROUND R jack (14, 18) Additional Information D SPEAKER SURROUND L jack (14, 18) 107GB Language Code List The language spellings conform to the ISO 639: 1988 (E/F) standard. 108GB Code Language Code Language Code Language 1027 1028 1032 1039 1044 1045 1051 1052 1053 1057 1059 1060 1061 1066 1067 1070 1079 1093 1097 1103 1105 1109 1130 1142 1144 1145 1149 1150 1151 1157 1165 1166 1171 1174 1181 1183 1186 1194 1196 1203 1209 1217 1226 1229 1233 1235 1239 Afar Abkhazian Afrikaans Amharic Arabic Assamese Aymara Azerbaijani Bashkir Byelorussian Bulgarian Bihari Bislama Bengali; Bangla Tibetan Breton Catalan Corsican Czech Welsh Danish German Bhutani Greek English Esperanto Spanish Estonian Basque Persian Finnish Fiji Faroese French Frisian Irish Scots Gaelic Galician Guarani Gujarati Hausa Hindi Croatian Hungarian Armenian Interlingua Interlingue 1245 1248 1253 1254 1257 1261 1269 1283 1287 1297 1298 1299 1300 1301 1305 1307 1311 1313 1326 1327 1332 1334 1345 1347 1349 1350 1352 1353 1356 1357 1358 1363 1365 1369 1376 1379 1393 1403 1408 1417 1428 1435 1436 1463 1481 1482 1483 Inupiak Indonesian Icelandic Italian Hebrew Japanese Yiddish Javanese Georgian Kazakh Greenlandic Cambodian Kannada Korean Kashmiri Kurdish Kirghiz Latin Lingala Laothian Lithuanian Latvian; Lettish Malagasy Maori Macedonian Malayalam Mongolian Moldavian Marathi Malay Maltese Burmese Nauru Nepali Dutch Norwegian Occitan (Afan) Oromo Oriya Punjabi Polish Pashto; Pushto Portuguese Quechua Rhaeto-Romance Kirundi Romanian 1489 1491 1495 1498 1501 1502 1503 1505 1506 1507 1508 1509 1511 1512 1513 1514 1515 1516 1517 1521 1525 1527 1528 1529 1531 1532 1534 1535 1538 1539 1540 1543 1557 1564 1572 1581 1587 1613 1632 1665 1684 1697 Russian Kinyarwanda Sanskrit Sindhi Sangho Serbo-Croatian Singhalese Slovak Slovenian Samoan Shona Somali Albanian Serbian Siswati Sesotho Sundanese Swedish Swahili Tamil Telugu Tajik Thai Tigrinya Turkmen Tagalog Setswana Tonga Turkish Tsonga Tatar Twi Ukrainian Urdu Uzbek Vietnamese Volap k Wolof Xhosa Yoruba Chinese Zulu 1703 Not specified DVD Setup Menu List You can set the following items with the DVD Setup menu. The order of the displayed items may be different from the actual display. LANGUAGE SETUP SCREEN SETUP OSD (Selects the language you want to use from the displayed language list.) TV TYPE* DVD MENU (Selects the language you want to use from the displayed language list.) SCREEN SAVER (Selects the language you want to use from the displayed language list.) SUBTITLE (Selects the language you want to use from the displayed language list.) CUSTOM SETUP VCD COLOR SYSTEM* AUTO PAL NTSC PARENTAL LEVEL OFF 8. CONTROL 7. NC17 6. R 5. 4. PG13 3. PG 2. 1. G STANDARD USA OTHERSt CHANGE PASSWORD TRACK OFF SELECTION AUTO AUDIO DRC OFF ON DATA CD PRIORITY MP3 JPEG JPEG DATE MM/DD/YYYY YYYY/MM/DD DD/MM/YYYY YYYY/DD/MM COMPONENT OUT *) The default settings vary, depending on the country model. Additional Information AUDIO BACKGROUND 16:9 4:3 LETTER BOX 4:3 PAN SCAN ON OFF JACKET PICTURE GRAPHICS 1 GRAPHICS 2 GRAPHICS 3 GRAPHICS 4 GRAPHICS 5 BLUE BLACK INTERLACE PROGRESSIVE YES NO *) Only for Asian, Australian, and Saudi Arabian models. continued 109GB SPEAKER SETUP SIZE FRONT CENTER SURROUND SURROUND BACK SUBWOOFER FRONT CENTER SURROUND SURROUND BACK CENTER SURROUND LEFT SURROUND RIGHT SURROUND BACK SUBWOOFER DISTANCE LEVEL BALANCE TEST TONE FRONT OFF ON YES YES NONE BEHIND SIDE NONE NONE YES YES 1.0m – 7.0m 1.0m – 7.0m* 1.0m – 7.0m* 1.0m – 7.0m* –6 dB – +6 dB –6 dB – +6 dB –6 dB – +6 dB –10 dB – +10 dB –6 dB – +6 dB 6 steps left or right * The setting range changes depending on the front speaker setting (page 87). SETUP QUICK RESET 110GB YES NO AMP Menu List You can set the following items with AMP MENU on the remote. CUSTOMIZE SP SETUP CENTER SP SURR SP CENTER Y CENTER N SURR Y SURR N SURR B SP SURR B N SURR B Y F DIST CEN DIST SURR DIST 1.0m - 7.0m 1.0m - 7.0m* 1.0m - 7.0m* 1.0m - 7.0m* SB DIST SP POS * The setting range changes depending on the front speaker setting (page 90). LEVEL TESTTONE F BALANCE T.TONE OFF T.TONE ON 6 steps left or right CEN LEVEL –6 dB - +6 dB SL LEVEL –6 dB - +6 dB SR LEVEL –6 dB - +6 dB SB LEVEL SW LEVEL –10 dB - +10 dB –6 dB - +6 dB AUDIO DRC DRC OFF DRC ON SB DEC DIMMER MAIN SUB MAIN+SUB MAIN/SUB SB MATRIX SB AUTO SB OFF DIM OFF DIM ON Additional Information SP BEHIND SP SIDE DUAL MONO 111GB Index Numerics F 16:9 83 4:3 LETTER BOX 83 4:3 PAN SCAN 83 Fast forward 49 Fast reverse 49 File 6, 99 Front Panel 102 Front panel display 103 A ALBUM 42, 50 Album 6, 98 ANGLE 65 Antenna (aerial) Hookups 23 AUDIO 56, 83 AUDIO DRC 86 B BACKGROUND 84 BALANCE 89 Batteries 11 C CHAPTER 51 Chapter 6, 98 COMPONENT OUT 84 Continuous play CD/VIDEO CD/Super Audio CD/DVD/MP3 37 Control Menu 9 CUSTOM PARENTAL CONTROL 67 CUSTOM SETUP 85 D DATA CD PRIORITY 86 Digital Cinema Sound 98 Digital Infrared Audio Transmission 98 DIMMER 81 DISPLAY 52 DISTANCE 87 Dolby Digital 98 Dolby Digital EX 98 Dolby Pro Logic II 98 Dolby Surround Pro Logic 99 DSGX 64 DTS 99 DTS-ES 99 DUAL MONO 76 DVD 99 DVD MENU 83 H Handling discs 8 I INDEX 51 Index 6, 99 INTERLACE 99 J JPEG 43 JPEG DATE 86 L LANGUAGE SETUP 83 LEVEL 88 Listening to the Radio 78 M MP3 41 Multi-angle function 65, 99 Multilingual function 56, 99 MUTING 38 N Neo:6 100 NIGHT MODE 64 O On-screen display Control Menu display 9 OSD 83 P PARENTAL CONTROL 69, 85, 100 PBC Playback 40, 100 PLAY MODE 45, 47 Preset Station 77 Program Play 45 PROGRESSIVE 100 R Radio 78 112GB Rear Panel 105 Region Code 7, 100 Remote 72, 106 REPEAT 48 Resume Play 39 S S VIDEO 25 Scan 49 SCENE 9 Scene 6, 100 SCREEN SAVER 84 SCREEN SETUP 83 Setup Display 82 SHUFFLE 47 Shuffle Play 47 SIZE 87 SLEEP 80 Slide show 44 Slow-motion 49 Sound Field 58 SPEAKER SETUP 87 Speaker System Hookup 12 SUBTITLE 66, 83 Super Audio CD 100 Surround Back Decoding Mode 62 T TEST TONE 89 TIME SEARCH 50 TITLE 50 Title 6, 101 TRACK 50 Track 6, 42, 101 TRACK SELECTION 86 Troubleshooting 93 TV and Video Component Hookups 25 TV TYPE 83 U Usable discs 6 V VCD COLOR SYSTEM 85 VIDEO CD 101 W Wireless system 22, 29 Additional Information 113GB Quick Reference for Remote Commander With cover opened. Note The remote control of the unit employs command signals in common with other Sony DVD products. Thus, depending on the button, other Sony DVD products may respond. A Ejects the disc. B Switches the item displayed on the front panel display. C Sets the system to turn off at a preset time. D ./>: Press to go to the next chapter or track or to go back to the previous chapter or track. PRESET –/+: Scan all preset stations. E Plays a disc. F Displays the title menu on the TV screen. MP3/JPEG: Selects albums. G Select and execute the items or settings. H Displays the Control Menu display on the TV screen to set or adjust the items. I Select the sound field. J Bass sound is effectively reinforced. K Displays the setup display on the TV screen to set or adjust the items. L Changes the subtitle. M Changes the sound. N Changes the angles when playing a DVD. O Select the items of settings. TV: Select channel numbers.* P Executes the items or settings. Q Press to store a preset station. Activates the name function. R Turns the TV on and off. 114GB S Turns on and off the power of the system. T Turns the SONY TV and the system on and changes the TV’s input source. U Selects AM or FM band. V Selects the component you want to use. W m/M (SCAN): Locate a point while monitoring the picture while playing a disc. / SLOW: Play a disc in slow motion in the pause mode. TUNING –/+: Scan all available radio stations. X Stops playing a disc. Y Pauses playing a disc. Z Mutes the sound. wj Displays the DVD menu on the TV screen. MP3/JPEG: Selects albums. wk Adjust the SYSTEM volume. wl Press to return to the previously selected screen, etc. e; Select the sound field. ea Makes sound clear at low volume. es Selects program or shuffle play mode. ed Displays the repeat status. ef Sets the remote to TV mode. Normal mode: turns off. TV mode: turns in red. eg Changes the input mode of the TV. eh Select the TV Channel. ej Adjust the TV volume. ek Sets the speaker parameter and changes the brightness of the front panel display by two steps. el Press to cancel the programmed track, etc. r; Switches monaural or stereo of FM stereo reception. * Depending on the TV manufacture, the following method also works. Press >10, then the number. (For example, for channel 25, press >10, then 2 and 5.) CT 3 警語 為防止火災或電擊,請勿將本機放在雨水所 及或潮濕的地方。 切勿將本設備安裝在狹窄的空間內,如書櫃或壁櫥 內。 為防止起火,切勿將報紙、桌布、窗簾等蓋住設備 的通風孔。也不要將點燃的蠟燭放在設備上。 為了防止火災或電擊危險,請勿將花瓶等裝滿液體 的物體放置在本設備上。 切勿將電池與普通生活垃圾一起 丟棄,應作為化學廢棄物正確處 理。 本設備歸類為 CLASS 1 LASER 產品。本標籤位 於設備的底部。 注意事項 安全 • 若有任何異物掉落到機殼內,請拔下本機的電源 插頭,並經合格的專業人員檢查以後,方可再行 使用。 • 只要本機的電源線仍連接在牆壁電源插座上,即 使本機的電源已經關閉,但本機仍然未與交流電 源斷開連接。 • 如果您打算長期不使用本機,請拔掉本機的電源 插頭。若要拔掉電源線,請抓住插頭拔,切勿拉 電線。 安裝 • 請保持足夠的空氣流通以防止機內積熱。 • 切勿將本機放在地毯、毯子等表面,或靠近窗簾、 綢緞等原料,以免阻塞通風孔。 • 切勿將本機安裝在靠近散熱器或排氣管等熱源附 近,或受陽光直射、多塵、有機械振動或衝擊的 地方。 • 請勿將本機安裝在傾斜的位置。本機必須在水平 位置上工作。 • 請勿將本機和光碟放在帶強磁場的裝置附近,如 微波爐或大功率擴音器。 • 請勿在本機上放置重物。 • 如果將本機直接從寒冷的地方搬到溫暖的地方, DVD 家庭影院系統內部可能會產生濕氣凝結,並 造成鏡頭損壞。當您第一次安裝本機時,或將本 機從寒冷的地方移到溫暖的場所,請在操作前等 待 30 分鐘左右。 2CT 廢電池請回收 鳴謝惠顧 ! 感謝您購買 Sony DVD 家庭影院系統。在操作 本系統之前,請詳細閱讀本說明書並妥善保 管以備將來參考。 注意事項 關於電源 交流電源線必須在有資格的維修商店更換。 關於放置 • 請將本系統放在通風良好的地方,以防止系統內 積熱。 • 長時間以大音量使用,機殼會變熱。這不是故障。 但請避免觸摸機殼。切勿將本機放在通風不良的 地方,否則可能造成過熱。 • 切勿在系統上放置任何東西,以免阻塞散熱風扇 或通風槽。也切勿將本系統放在地毯等柔軟的表 面,以免堵塞機底的通風孔。本系統配有大功率 放大器。如果散熱風扇或通風槽阻塞,本機會過 熱並產生故障。 • 切勿將本系統放在靠近熱源的地方,或受陽光直 射、多塵或有機械沖擊的地方。 關於操作 • 如果將本系統直接從寒冷的地方搬到溫暖的地 方,或放置在十分潮濕的房間,系統內的鏡頭會 產生濕氣凝結。如果發生此現象,本系統可能無 法正常操作。此時,請取出光碟,並將本系統在 電源接通的狀態下放置半小時左右,直到濕氣蒸 發。 • 移動本系統時,請取出所有光碟。否則,光碟可 能會損壞。 • 為了節省電源,按 "/1 鍵將系統設定為待機模式 (STANDBY 指示燈亮起)。若要完全關閉系統,請 從電源插座上拔掉交流電源線。 關於調節音量 當收聽低電平輸入或無音頻訊號的部分時,請勿將 音量調大。否則,當播放到峰值電平部分時,揚聲 器可能損壞。 關於清潔 請用蘸有少量中性清潔劑的軟布擦拭機殼、面板和 控制器。切勿使用任何類型的砂紙、拋光粉或溶液 (如酒精、汽油等)。 如果您有關於本系統的任何疑問或問題,請就近與 Sony 經銷商聯絡。 關於清潔光碟 切勿使用市面上購買的 CD/DVD 清潔盤,這可能導 致故障。 關於您電視機的色彩 如果揚聲器造成電視機螢幕色彩不正常,請立刻關 閉電視機,15 至 30 分鐘後再打開。若是色彩仍然 不正常,請將揚聲器放到遠離電視機的地方。 本商標位於設備的底部外表面。 重要注意事項 注意:本系統能在您的電視機螢幕上一直保持 靜止視頻影像或螢幕顯示影像。如果您在電視 機上長時間顯示靜止視頻影像或螢幕顯示影 像,電視機螢幕可能會有永久性損壞的危險。投 影電視機尤其易受此類損壞。 關於移動本系統 在搬運本系統時,請採取以下步驟以保護內部機械 裝置。 1 2 3 確保光碟已從系統中取出。 反覆按 FUNCTION 選擇 “DVD”。 同時按 .,>,和 Z。 前面板顯示變為 “MECHA LOCK”。 若要取消,按 "/1。 4 從電源插座上拔掉交流電源線。 3CT 目錄 鳴謝惠顧 ! ...................... 注意事項........................ 關於本使用說明書 ............... 本系統可播放下列光碟 ........... 光碟術語........................ 關於光碟注意事項 ............... 控制菜單顯示指南 ............... 3 3 6 6 6 8 9 入門指南 打開包裝....................... 裝入遙控器電池 ................ 步驟 1:揚聲器系統連接 ......... 步驟 2:天線連接 ............... 步驟 3:電視機和視頻組件連接 ... 步驟 4:連接交流電源線 ......... 步驟 5:調節無線系統 ........... 步驟 6:進行快速設定 ........... 揚聲器設定..................... 11 11 12 23 25 29 29 34 36 播放光碟 播放光碟....................... 37 從停播點恢復播放 .............. 39 (恢復播放) 使用 DVD 菜單................... 40 播放有 PBC 功能的 VIDEO CD (2.0 版)................... 40 (PBC 播放) 播放 MP3 音頻軌跡 .............. 41 播放 JPEG 影像檔案 ............. 43 創建自己的編序 ................ 45 (編序播放) 隨機播放....................... 47 (隨機播放) 重複播放....................... 48 (重複播放) 搜尋光碟上的特定點 ............ 49 (掃描,慢動作播放) 搜尋標題 / 章 / 軌跡 / 索引 / 文件夾 / 檔案 ....................... 50 檢視光碟資訊 .................. 52 4CT 聲音調節 改變聲音 ....................... 56 欣賞環繞聲 ..................... 58 選擇後環繞解碼模式 ............. 62 使用聲音效果 ................... 64 使用各種附加功能 改變角度 ....................... 65 顯示字幕 ....................... 66 鎖定光碟 ....................... 67 (用戶鎖定、視聽者年齡控制) 其他操作 用提供的遙控器控制電視機 ....... 72 使用 SONY TV DIRECT 功能 ........ 74 使用錄影機或其他裝置 ........... 75 欣賞多路廣播聲音 ( 雙單聲道) ... 76 欣賞無線電廣播 ................. 76 使用睡眠定時器 ................. 79 更改前面板顯示幕的亮度 ......... 80 返回預設設定 ................... 80 設定和調整 使用設定顯示 ................... 81 設定顯示或聲音軌跡語言 ......... 82 (語言設定) 顯示設定 ....................... 82 (畫面設定) 個人設定 ....................... 84 (個人設定) 揚聲器設定 ..................... 86 (揚聲器設定) 快速設定和重新設定系統 ......... 91 (設定) 附加資訊 故障排除 ....................... 92 規格 ...........................94 術語 ...........................96 部件和控制器索引 ...............99 語言代碼一覽表 ................ 105 DVD 設定菜單列表 .............. 106 AMP 菜單列表................... 108 索引 .......................... 109 遙控器快速參考 ............... 封底 5CT “DVD VIDEO”標誌是一個商標。 關於本使用說明書 • 本手冊中的說明描述遙控器上的控制鍵。 如果在系統上有與遙控器上名稱相同或相 似的控制鍵,則也可以使用。 • 本手冊中使用下列符號。 符號 涵義 適用於視頻模式的 DVD VIDEO, DVD-R/DVD-RW 和 DVD+R/DVD+RW 的 功能 VIDEO CD 模式中可使用的功能 CD 模式中可使用的功能 Super Audio CD 和 Audio CD 模式 中可使用的功能 適用於 MP3* 音頻軌跡的功能 適用於 JPEG 檔案的功能 * MP3 (MPEG1 Audio Layer 3)是由 ISO/MPEG 定 義的壓縮音頻資料的標準格式。 本系統可播放下列光碟 光碟格式 DVD VIDEO 光碟標誌 光碟術語 • 標題 視頻軟體中 DVD、電影等最長的影像或音樂 部分,或音頻軟體中的整個文件夾。 •章 比標題小的影像或音樂部分。一個標題由幾 個章組成。視光碟而定,某些光碟可能沒有 錄製章。 • 文件夾 包含 MP3 音頻軌跡或 JPEG 檔案的資料 CD 上 的一段音樂或影像。 • 軌跡 VIDEO CD、Super Audio CD、CD 或 MP3 中 的一段影像或音樂。 • 索引 (Super Audio CD、CD)/ 視頻索引 (VIDEO CD) VIDEO CD、Super Audio CD 或 CD 上將一個 軌跡分為多個部分的一個數字,以便於找到 您想要的點。視光碟而定,可能未錄製索引。 • 場面 在有 PBC 功能的 VIDEO CD 上 ( 第 40 頁 ), 菜單螢幕、運動影像和靜止影像被分成多個 部分,各部分稱為 “場面”。 • 檔案 包含 JPEG 影像檔案的資料 CD 中的影像部 分。 光碟 DVD 結構 Super Audio CD VIDEO CD VIDEO CD, Super Audio CD, 或 CD 結構 標題 章 光碟 軌跡 索引 光碟 Audio CD MP3 結構 文件夾 軌跡 光碟 CD-R/CD-RW (音頻資料) (MP3 檔案) (JPEG 檔案) 6CT JPEG 結構 文件夾 檔案 有關 PBC (播放控制)注意事項 (VIDEO CD) 本系統符合 VIDEO CD 標準 1.1 版和 2.0 版。 您可以根據光碟的類型體驗到兩種類型的播 放。 光碟類型 您可以 無 PBC 功能的 VIDEO CD (1.1 版光碟) 欣賞影像播放(動畫)以及音 樂。 有 PBC 功能的 VIDEO CD (2.0 版光碟) 除 1.1 版光碟的視頻播放功能 外,還可以使用電視螢幕上顯 示的菜單畫面來播放交互式 軟體 (PBC 播放)。此外,您 也可以播放光碟上的高解析 度靜止影像。 關於 Multi Session CD • 當 MP3 音頻軌跡包含在第一話路中時,本系 統可以播放 Multi Session CD。錄製在以 後話路中的任何 MP3 音頻軌跡也可以播放。 • 當 JPEG 影像檔案包含在第一話路中時,本 系統可以播放 Multi Session CD。錄製在 以後話路中的任何 JPEG 影像檔案也可以播 放。 • 如果以音樂 CD 格式或視頻 CD 格式錄製的 音頻軌跡錄製在第一話路上,則僅播放第一 話路。 地區代碼 您的系統在裝置背後印有一個地區代碼,系 統只能播放標有相同地區代碼的 DVD 光碟。 標有 ALL 的 DVD 也可以在本系統上播放。 如果您試圖播放任何其他 DVD,電視螢幕上 將會出現 [ 由於地區限制,此光碟禁止播 放。] 的資訊。根據 DVD 的不同,有些受到 地區限制而不能播放的 DVD,可能並未給出 地區代碼指示。 本系統不能播放的光碟示例 本系統不能播放下列光碟: • CD-ROM (副檔名 “.MP3”、“.JPG”或 “.JPEG”除外) • 除了以下列格式錄製的 CD-R/CD-RW: –音頻 CD 格式 –視頻 CD 格式 –符合 ISO9660* Level 1/Level 2 的 MP3 格 式,或其擴展格式,Joliet • CD-Extra 的資料部分 • DVD-ROM • DVD 音頻光碟 • DVD-RAM • VR (視頻錄製)模式中的 DVD-RW • 逐行 JPEG 檔案 * CD-ROM 中由 ISO (國際標準化組織)定義 的檔案和資料夾的邏輯格式 切勿裝載下列光碟: • 有不同地區代碼的 DVD (第 7,96 頁)。 • 非標準也非圓形的光碟 (例如卡片形、心 形或星形)。 • 貼有紙片或不乾膠標籤的光碟。 • 留有黏膠或玻璃紙膠帶的光碟。 關於 CD-R/CD-RW/DVD-R/DVD-RW (視頻模式)/DVD+R/DVD+RW 注意事項 在某些情況中,由於錄製品質或光碟的物理狀況, 或錄製設備的特性以及製作軟體,本播放機無法播 放 CD-R/CD-RW/DVD-R/DVD-RW(視頻模式)/DVD+R/ DVD+RW。 如果光碟未正確錄製完成,也無法播放。詳細資 訊,請參閱錄製設備的操作說明。 請注意,本機無法播放以 Packet Write 格式建立 的光碟。 用版權保護技術編碼的音樂光碟 本產品是專為播放符合 Compact Disc (CD)標準 的光碟而設計。 最近,一些唱片公司在市場上銷售用版權保護技術 編碼的各種光碟。請注意在這些光碟中,有些不符 合 CD 標準的光碟可能無法在本系統上播放。 播放 DVD 和 VIDEO CD 時的注意事項 有些 DVD 和 VIDEO CD 的播放操作可能受到軟 體製作者的特別設置。由於本系統是根據軟 體製作者設計的光碟內容播放 DVD 和 VIDEO CD 的,所以某些播放性能可能無法使用。同 樣,請參閱 DVD 或 VIDEO CD 附帶的說明。 版權 本產品含有版權保護技術,該技術受美國專 利和其他知識產權保護。使用此版權保護技 術時,必須獲得 Macrovision 公司的許可, 續 7CT 且僅供家 庭和其他限制性觀看,除 非獲得 Macrovision 公司的允許。禁止逆向設計或 拆卸。 本系統合併了 Dolby* Digital 和 Dolby Pro Logic(II)適應矩陣環繞解碼器和 DTS** 數 位環繞系統。 * 經杜比實驗室授權生產。 “Dolby”、“Pro Logic”和雙 D 標誌是杜比實 驗室的商標。 ** 經 Digital Theater System 公司許可下生產。 “DTS”、“DTS-ES”、“Neo:6”和“DTS Digital Surround”是 Digital Theater System 公司的 商標。 關於光碟注意事項 關於操作光碟 • 為了保持光碟清潔,請拿光碟的邊緣部分。 請勿觸摸光碟表面。 • 切勿在光碟上黏貼紙張或膠帶紙。 • 切勿將光碟放在直射陽光下,或如散熱管等 熱源附近,也勿將其留在停在直射陽光下的 汽車裡,因為車內溫度會很高。 • 播放完畢後,請將光碟放在光碟盒內保存。 關於清潔 • 播放之前,請用乾淨的布擦拭光碟。 請從中心向外擦。 • 切勿使用汽油、稀釋劑、商用清潔劑,或用 於聚乙烯 LP 的防靜電噴霧劑。 本系統只能播放標準圓形光碟。使用非標準 也非圓形光碟 (如卡片形、心形或星形)可 能會造成故障。 切勿使用帶有附件的光碟,如標籤或圓環。 8CT 控制菜單顯示指南 使用控制菜單選擇您要使用的一項功能。當按下 DVD DISPLAY 鍵時將出現控制菜單顯示。詳細 情況,請參閱括號內頁。 當前播放 的章號 (VIDEO CD/ Super Audio CD/CD:軌跡號) 錄製的標題或軌 錄製的章或索引總數 跡總數 當前播放的標題 播放狀態 名稱 光碟名稱或光 (N 播放、X 暫停、x 停止等。) 碟類型 當前播放的章號 (VIDEO CD/ Super Audio CD/CD:索引號) 正在播放的光碟類型 播放時間 當前設置 所選擇的控制菜 單項目圖示 選項 控制菜單項目 所選擇的控制菜單 項目功能名稱 操作資訊 控制菜單項目列表 光碟 顯示已插入系統的光碟名稱或光碟類型。 標題 (僅限 DVD)( 第 50 頁 ) / 選擇標題 (DVD)或軌跡 (VIDEO CD)進行播放。 顯示場面 (以 PBC 播放 VIDEO CD)。 場面 (僅適用 PBC 播放 VIDEO CD)/ 軌跡 (僅限 VIDEO CD)( 第 50 頁 ) 章 (僅適用 DVD)( 第 51 頁 ) / 選擇章 (DVD)或索引 (VIDEO CD)進行播放。 索引 (僅適用 VIDEO CD)( 第 51 頁 ) 文件夾 (僅適用 MP3) 選擇文件夾 (MP3)進行播放。 (第 42,50 頁) 軌跡 (僅適用 Super Audio CD/ 選擇軌跡 (Super Audio CD/CD/MP3)進行播放。 CD/MP3)(第 42,50 頁) 索引 (僅適用 Super Audio CD/ 顯示索引並選擇索引 (Super Audio CD)進行播放。 CD)( 第 51 頁 ) 時間 ( 第 51 頁 ) 查看已播放時間和剩餘播放時間。 輸入進行影像和音樂搜尋的時間代碼。 聲音(僅適用DVD/VIDEO CD/Super 改變聲音設置。 Audio CD/CD/MP3)( 第 56 頁 ) 字幕語言(僅限 DVD)( 第 66 頁 ) 顯示字幕。 改變字幕語言。 續 9CT 文件夾(僅適用 JPEG)( 第 43 頁 ) 選擇文件夾 (JPEG)進行播放。 檔案 (僅適用 JPEG)( 第 43 頁 ) 選擇檔案 (JPEG)進行播放。 日期 (僅適用 JPEG)( 第 55 頁 ) 顯示日期資訊。 角度 (僅適用 DVD)( 第 65 頁 ) 改變角度。 播放模式(僅適用VIDEO CD/Super 選擇播放模式。 Audio CD/CD/MP3/JPEG)( 第 47 頁 ) 重複 ( 第 48 頁 ) 反覆播放整個光碟(所有標題 / 所有軌跡)、一個標題 / 章 / 軌跡 / 文件夾,或編序目錄。 用戶鎖定 ( 第 67 頁 ) 將光碟設置為禁止播放。 提示 • 您每按一下 DVD DISPLAY 鍵,控制菜單顯示如下改變: 控制菜單顯示 m 控制菜單關閉 控制菜單項目視光碟不同而有差異。 • 除非將 [ 重複播放 ] 設定為 [ 關 ],控制菜單圖示指示燈點亮為綠色 • 只有當光碟上錄製了多角度,[ 角度 ] 指示燈才點亮為綠色。 10CT t 。 打開包裝 請檢查包裝內有以下物品: • 揚聲器 (5) • 超低音揚聲器 (1) • 環繞聲放大器 (1) • 安裝底座 (1) • 環繞揚聲器連接盤 (2) • 連接螺絲 (4) • IR 發射器 a) (1) • IR 接收器 a)b) (1) • IR 接收器底座 b) (1) • 調幅環形天線 (1) • 調頻導線式天線 (1) • 揚聲器導線(3.5m × 3,5m × 2,7cm × 2) • 視頻線 (1) • 遙控器 (遙控)RM-SP320 (1) • AAA 尺寸 (R03)電池 (2) • 使用說明書 • 揚聲器-連接和安裝 (卡)(1) 裝入遙控器電池 您可以用 提供 的遙控 器控 制系統。將兩 個 AAA 尺寸 (R03)電池兩端的 3 和 # 分別 對準電池艙內的標誌裝入。使用遙控器時, 請將遙控器指向系統上的遙控感應窗 。 入門指南 入門指南 取下蓋子。 a) IR 發射器和 IR 接收器的連接導線只能用於本 系統。您不能使用市售的延長線。 b) 當環繞聲放大器 IR 接收器由於位置原因無法 接收紅外線時使用。詳細資訊,請參閱 “使用 IR 接收器”( 第 30 頁 )。 注意 • 切勿將遙控器放置在極熱或潮濕的地方。 • 切勿將新舊電池混合使用。 • 切勿將任何異物掉落到遙控器內,特別是在更換 電池時。 • 切勿將遙控感應窗暴露於直射陽光或照明器械 下。否則可能引起故障。 • 如果長時間不使用遙控器,請取出電池以避免因 電池漏液和腐蝕而造成損壞。 11CT 步驟 1:揚聲器系統連接 用提供的揚聲器導線連接提供的揚聲器,插孔的顏色應與導線的顏色一致。除本系統提供的揚 聲器,切勿連接任何其他揚聲器。 為了盡可能獲得最佳的環繞聲,請指定第 36 頁上的揚聲器參數 (距離、電平等等)。 所需要的導線 揚聲器導線 接頭和揚聲器導線上的色環與被連接插孔的標記顏色相同。 (-) (-) (+) (+) 色環 無線系統所必需的裝置 IR 發射器 通過紅外線傳送聲音。將其連接至系統。 環繞聲放大器 環繞聲放大器上裝有 IR 接收器。它可從 IR 傳送器接收聲音並將其傳遞給環繞聲揚聲器。 IR 接收器 POWER/ON LINE 您可以將環繞聲放大器與環繞聲揚聲器組合起來,這樣可以使電纜線和整個影院系統變得整齊 ( 第 14 頁 )。 12CT IR 接收器 入門指南 當環繞聲放大器 IR 接收器由於位置原因無法接收紅外線時使用。與環繞聲放大器連接。詳細 資訊,請參閱 “使用 IR 接收器”( 第 30 頁 )。 使用 IR 接收器底座時,請將 IR 接收器上的兩個三角標誌和底座上的標誌對準進行對接。 IR 接收器 三角標誌 IR 接收器底座 注意 當您將 IR 接收器與環繞聲放大器相連時,IR 接收器被開啟而環繞聲放大器的 IR 接收器不會被自動開啟。 續 13CT 裝配環繞聲放大器和環繞聲揚聲器 1 將環繞聲放大器螺栓和環繞聲揚聲器 (左)插孔相接合,然後將環繞聲揚聲器 (左)向前推。 環繞聲揚聲器 (左)表面上有 “SURR L”標誌。 環繞聲揚聲器 (左) 環繞聲放大器 “SURR L”標誌 插孔 2 m 螺栓 連接揚聲器電纜。 揚聲器電纜 (7cm) 顏色必須與插孔顏色相符。 環繞聲放大器後部 環繞聲揚聲器 (左)後部 SURROUND L SPEAKER SPEAKER SURROUND R DIR-R2 14CT 3 用連接螺絲固定環繞揚聲器連接盤。 入門指南 環繞揚聲器連接盤 連接螺絲 注意揚聲器電纜線不能從連接盤中拔出。 4 連接環繞聲揚聲器 (右)。 請依照與連接環繞聲揚聲器 (左)相同的安裝過程。(參見步驟 1 至 3。) 完整影像 續 15CT 從環繞聲放大器上卸除環繞聲揚聲器 1 拆下連接螺絲,然後拆下環繞揚聲器連接盤。 連接螺絲 環繞揚聲器連接盤 2 3 拆下揚聲器電纜。 將環繞聲揚聲器向後拉出。 , 16CT 揚聲器連接端子 連接 連接到 前置揚聲器 系統的 SPEAKER FRONT L (白色)和 R (紅色)插孔 中置揚聲器 系統的 SPEAKER CENTER (綠色)插孔 超低音揚聲器 系統的 SPEAKER WOOFER (紫色)插孔 IR 發射器 系統的 DIR-T1 (粉紅)插孔 前置揚聲器 (右) 入門指南 當使用連接到環繞聲放大器的揚聲器時 前置揚聲器 (左) 中置揚聲器 VIDEO SPEAKER FRONT R CENTER FRONT L R AUDIO IN SURROUND R BACK AUDIO IN Y PB/CB PR/CR L S VIDEO (DVD ONLY) DIR-T1 WOOFER WOOFER 超低音揚聲器 COMPOMEMT VIDEO OUT L SAT VIDEO MONITOR OUT IR 發射器 IR 接收器 當您不使用環繞聲放大器的 IR 接 收器時使用 ( 第 30 頁 )。 環繞揚聲器 (右) 環繞揚聲器 (左) SURROUND L SPEAKER SPEAKER SURROUND R DIR-R2 續 17CT 當獨立使用揚聲器和環繞聲放大器時 連接 連接到 前置揚聲器 系統的 SPEAKER FRONT L (白色)和 R (紅色)插孔 中置揚聲器 系統的 SPEAKER CENTER (綠色)插孔 超低音揚聲器 系統的 SPEAKER WOOFER (紫色)插孔 環繞揚聲器 環繞聲放大器的 SPEAKER SURROUND L (藍色) 和 R (灰色)插孔 IR 發射器 系統的 DIR-T1 (粉紅)插孔 前置揚聲器 (右) 前置揚聲器 (左) 中置揚聲器 VIDEO SPEAKER FRONT R CENTER R AUDIO IN SURROUND R BACK AUDIO IN FRONT L Y PB/CB S VIDEO (DVD ONLY) PR/CR L DIR-T1 WOOFER WOOFER 超低音揚聲器 COMPOMEMT VIDEO OUT L SAT VIDEO MONITOR OUT IR 發射器 IR 接收器 當您不使用環繞聲放大器的 IR 接 收器時使用 ( 第 30 頁 )。 環繞揚聲器 (左) SURROUND L SPEAKER SPEAKER SURROUND R DIR-R2 18CT 環繞揚聲器 (右) 放置揚聲器的注意事項 入門指南 • 切勿將揚聲器安裝在傾斜的位置。 • 切勿將揚聲器安放在: – 過熱或過冷的地方 – 積灰或骯髒的地方 – 非常潮濕的地方 – 易受振動的地方 – 易受陽光直射的地方 • 在將超低音揚聲器、高揚聲器放置在經特別處理 (打蠟、塗油、拋光等)地板上時,請小心可能會造成 著色或變色。 安裝 IR 傳送器和環繞聲放大器 (或 IR 接收器)的注意事項 • 切勿將環繞聲放大器 (或 IR 接收器)安裝在受陽光直射,或受諸如白光燈的強光照射的環境中。 • IR 發射器和 IR 接收器的連接導線只能用於本系統。您不能使用市售的延長線。 注意 切勿將揚聲器導線的絕緣部分夾在 SPEAKER 插孔中。 提示 將揚聲器導線絕緣部分尾端的揚聲器金屬導線彎曲後再進行連接。這樣便能防止揚聲器導線夾在 SPEAKER 插孔中。 續 19CT 若要連接後環繞揚聲器 本系統與 6.1 環繞系統相容。當您欣賞諸如 DTS-ES 等與 6.1 環繞系統相容的 DVD 光碟時,請 連接後環繞揚聲器並對其進行參數設定 (請參見 “揚聲器設定”第 86 頁)。 VIDEO SPEAKER FRONT R CENTER R FRONT L AUDIO IN Y PB/CB S VIDEO (DVD ONLY) PR/CR L OPTICAL DIGITAL IN AM FM 75 COAXIAL DIR-T1 SURROUND R BACK WOOFER WOOFER COMPOMEMT VIDEO OUT AUDIO IN SAT L SAT VIDEO MONITOR OUT 放大器 AUDIO IN 後環繞揚聲器 提示 當播放 2 或 5.1 聲道的音源時,通過使用後環繞解碼功能,您也能欣賞 6.1 環繞聲音。(請參見第 62 頁上 的 “選擇後環繞解碼模式”) 避免揚聲器短路 揚聲器短路可能會損壞系統。為防止揚聲器短路,連接揚聲器時必須遵守以下注意事項。應確 保每個揚聲器導線的電線裸露部分不能觸到另一個揚聲器插孔或另一個揚聲器導線的電線裸 露部分。 揚聲器導線不良連接示例 裸露的揚聲器導線接觸到另 一個揚聲器端子。 由於絕緣層除去過多而使 電線裸露部分相互接觸。 在連接完所有組件、揚聲器和交流電源線後,將輸出一個測試音調以檢測所有揚聲器是否連接 正確。有關輸出測試音調的詳細說明,請參見第 88 頁。 如果輸出測試音調時揚聲器中沒有聲音,或者播放出測試音調的揚聲器不是前面板顯示幕中當 前所顯示的揚聲器,則揚聲器可能短路。如果發生上述情況,請再次檢查揚聲器連接。 注意 • 請確保揚聲器導線與對應組件端子的極性相一致:3 至 3,且 # 至 #。如果電線接反,聲音將缺少低音並 可能失真。 • 如果揚聲器導線連接不正確或您在短路的情況下調高音量,前面板顯示幕中將出現 “PROTECT”且系統進 入待機模式。此時,將交流電源線與電源插座先斷開,再連接,然後再將系統打開。 20CT 更換揚聲器導線 入門指南 如果要使用另外的揚聲器導線,您可以鬆開插頭連接另外的導線。 拆除 導線夾 將導線夾面朝下,在平坦的表面向下按住插頭,然後從插頭中抽出導線。 連接 在平坦的表面向下按住插頭,插入新的揚聲器導線。 請注意,有標誌線的一根導線必須連接到插頭的負極 (-)。 注意 • 連接 / 拆除揚聲器導線時,請小心不要損壞您所使用 (桌子等等)的表面。 • 使用超低音揚聲器導線時,請注意,兩根外側的黑色導線或是標有字母的導線是負極。 (-) (-) (+) (+) (-) (-) • 如果超低音揚聲器導線連接不正確或您在短路的情況下調高音量,前面板顯示幕中將出現 “PROTECT”且 系統進入待機模式。此時,將交流電源線與電源插座先斷開,再連接,然後再將系統打開。 提示 • 您可以使用市場上有售的任何標準揚聲器導線 AWG #18 - AWG #22。 • 在連接新的導線之前,先將導線的絕緣部分剝去 10 mm,然後將兩根裸露的金屬導線捻成繩狀。 10 mm 續 21CT 關於無線系統 無線系統採用數位紅外線音頻傳輸系統 ( 第 97 頁 )。下圖指示紅外線傳送區域 (紅外線可到 達的範圍)。 當使用環繞聲放大器的 IR 接收器時 頂視圖 側視圖 紅外線訊號 紅外線訊號 10 10 10 10 IR 發射器 約 10m IR 接收器 IR 發射器 約 10m IR 接收器 環繞聲放大器 環繞聲放大器 使用 IR 接收器時 頂視圖 側視圖 紅外線訊號 紅外線訊號 10 10 10 10 IR 發射器 約 10m IR 接收器 IR 發射器 約 10m IR 接收器 注意 • 切勿將環繞聲放大器 (或 IR 接收器)放置在受陽光直射,或受諸如白光燈的強光照射的環境中。 • 切勿使用非影院系統提供的環繞聲放大器 (或 IR 接收器)。 22CT 步驟 2:天線連接 入門指南 連接所提供的調幅 / 調頻天線以收聽無線電台。 天線連接端子 連接 連接到 調幅環形天線 AM 端子 調頻導線式天線 FM 75Ω COAXIAL 插孔 調幅環形天線 VIDEO SPEAKER FRONT R CENTER R FRONT L Y AUDIO IN PB/CB PR/CR L S VIDEO (DVD ONLY) OPTICAL DIGITAL IN AM FM 75 COAXIAL DIR-T1 SURROUND R BACK WOOFER COMPOMEMT VIDEO OUT L AUDIO IN SAT WOOFER SAT VIDEO MONITOR OUT 調頻導線式天線 注意 • 為防止產生噪聲,應保持調幅環形天線遠離系統和其他組件。 • 必須將調頻導線式天線充分伸展開。 • 連接調頻導線式天線後,應盡可能使天線保持水平。 提示 連接隨機提供的調幅環型天線時,導線 (A)和導線 (B)可以連接在任何一個端子中。 AM A B 續 23CT 提示 如果調頻接收狀況不良,請使用 75Ω 同軸電纜 (不提供),如下圖所示將系統連接到室外調頻天線。 室外調頻天線 AM 系統 24CT FM 75 COAXIAL 步驟 3:電視機和視頻組件連接 入門指南 所需要的導線 連接電視機的視頻線 黃色 音頻線 (不提供) 連接上述導線時,應確保套環的顏色與組件上適當的插孔相一致。 白色 (L/ 音頻) 紅色 (R/ 音頻) 連接視頻組件端子 連接 連接到 電視機 (VIDEO IN) MONITOR OUT (VIDEO)插孔 錄影機 (AUDIO OUT) VIDEO (AUDIO IN)插孔 數位衛星接收器 (AUDIO OUT) SAT (AUDIO IN) 插孔 注意 • 視頻訊號輸出如下: – [ 畫面設定 ] 中 [ 分量視頻輸出 ] 設定為 [ 隔行 ] 時 ( 第 83 頁 ) (預設) 視頻訊號從 MONITOR OUT 的 S VIDEO 和 VIDEO 插孔輸出。 – [ 畫面設定 ] 中 [ 分量視頻輸出 ] 設定為 [ 逐行 ] 時 ( 第 83 頁 ) 視頻訊號僅從 COMPONENT VIDEO OUT 插孔輸出。 • 當連接錄影機或數位衛星接收器至本系統的 VIDEO/SAT 插孔時,請將功能改變到 VIDEO 或 SAT( 第 75 頁 )。 提示 • 當使用 S 視頻插孔代替視頻插孔時,您的電視監視器也必須通過 S 視頻插孔連接。S 視頻訊號是與視頻訊號 分離的總線,並且不透過視頻插孔輸出。 • 當使用 COMPONENT VIDEO OUT 插孔 (Y,PB/CB,PR/CR)代替視頻插孔時,您的電視監視器也必須透過 COMPONENT VIDEO OUT 插孔 (Y,PB/CB,PR/CR)連接。如果您的電視機接收逐行格式訊號,您必須使用 此連接,並在 [ 畫面設定 ] 中將 [ 分量視頻輸出 ] 設定為 [ 逐行 ]( 第 83 頁 )。 續 25CT 具有 COMPONENT VIDEO IN 插孔的電視機 錄影機 AUDIO OUT Y L PB/CB R PR/CR IN OUT VIDEO SPEAKER FRONT R CENTER R FRONT L AUDIO IN Y PB/CB PR/CR L OPTICAL DIGITAL IN S VIDEO (DVD ONLY) AM FM 75 COAXIAL DIR-T1 SURROUND R BACK WOOFER AUDIO OUT OPTICAL DIGITAL OUT AUDIO IN SAT WOOFER OUT OUT COMPOMEMT VIDEO OUT SAT L VIDEO MONITOR OUT IN IN S VIDEO IN VIDEO IN L R 數位衛星接收器或 PlayStation 2 等等 電視機 具有 S VIDEO IN 插孔的電視機 注意 • 緊固連接以避免不必要的噪音。 • 請參閱隨電視機提供的說明書。 • 本系統無法輸出音頻訊號到連接的電視機上。系統揚聲器僅輸出電視機的音頻訊號。 如果連接帶有 OPTICAL OUT 插孔的數位衛星接收器 數位衛星接收器可以連接到系統的 SAT OPTICAL DIGITAL IN 插孔,而不是 SAT AUDIO IN (L/R)插孔。 本系統可接收數位和類比兩種訊號。數位訊號優先於類比訊號。如果數位訊號停止,將在 2 秒 鐘後處理類比訊號。 如果連接不帶有 OPTICAL OUT 插孔的數位衛星接收器 只能將數位衛星接收器連接到系統的 SAT AUDIO IN (L/R)插孔。 使用本系統聽電玩 (如:PlayStation 2)聲音 使用音頻線 (不提供)將電玩的音頻輸出插孔連接到系統的 SAT AUDIO IN (L/R)插孔。 26CT 若要改變彩色制式 (PAL 或 NTSC) * 入門指南 * 僅適用於亞洲、澳洲和沙烏地阿拉伯機型。 視所連接的電視機而定,可能需要選擇彩色制式 PAL 或 NTSC。 對於澳洲和沙烏地阿拉伯機型,彩色制式的初始設定為 PAL。 對於亞洲機型,彩色制式的初始設定為 NTSC。 如果電視機的彩色制式為 PAL 若要將彩色制式從 NTSC 設定至 PAL,則按住系統上的 . 不放再按遙控器上的 "/1,打開系統。 您需按住 . 不放,直至系統電源打開。 若要復原至 NTSC,則先關閉系統,然後按住系統上的 . 不放再按遙控器上的 "/1,重新打 開系統。 如果電視機的彩色制式為 NTSC 用與上述相同的操作將彩色制式從 PAL 設定至 NTSC。 連接至標準 4:3 螢幕電視機時 視光碟的不同情況而定,影像可能不適合電視機螢幕。 如果您要改變縱橫比,請參閱第 82 頁。 您的電視機接收逐行訊號嗎? 逐行是一種顯示電視機影像的方法,可以減少影像閃爍,使畫面清晰。 若要使用這種顯示方法,您需要連接至接收逐行訊號的電視機並將 COMPONENT VIDEO OUT 的輸 出訊號設定為逐行格式。詳細說明,請參見第 83 頁上的 “若要設定 [ 逐行 ]”。 如果電視機無法接收逐行訊號,卻誤設了逐行格式 影像可能無法顯示或失真。這時,請將設定復原至隔行格式。 . FUNCTION 1 2 反覆按 FUNCTION 鍵,直至前面板顯示幕中出現 “DVD”。 按下 . 鍵時,按 FUNCTION 鍵。 輸出訊號改變為隔行格式。 續 27CT 揚聲器輸出電視機或錄影機聲音 1 連接音頻線 用音頻線連接電視機或錄影機的 AUDIO OUT (L/R)插孔和本系統的 VIDEO 插孔 (AUDIO IN L/R)。 電視機或錄影機 * AUDIO OUT L R VIDEO SPEAKER FRONT R CENTER R FRONT L AUDIO IN Y PB/CB PR/CR L S VIDEO (DVD ONLY) OPTICAL DIGITAL IN AM FM 75 COAXIAL DIR-T1 SURROUND R BACK WOOFER WOOFER COMPOMEMT VIDEO OUT AUDIO IN SAT L SAT VIDEO MONITOR OUT * AUDIO OUT (L/R)插孔 如果電視機沒有 AUDIO OUT (L/R)插孔,系統揚聲器將無法輸出電視機聲音。 2 改變系統模式 反覆按 FUNCTION 鍵選擇 “VIDEO”。 注意 請確保緊固連接以避免交流聲和噪音。如果使用 VIDEO 插孔出現聲音失真,請將電視機或錄影機重新連接 至 SAT。 提示 如果您要從 6 個揚聲器中輸出電視機聲音或 2 聲道音源的立體聲聲音,則選擇除 “AUTO FORMAT DIRECT AUTO”或 “2 CHANNEL STEREO”以外的任何聲場 ( 第 58 頁 )。 28CT 步驟 4:連接交流電源線 步驟 5:調節無線系統 連接揚聲器、IR 發射器和交流電源線之後, 為了得到良好的傳送,請調節無線系統。 提示 IR 發射器是可移動式,很容易定位。 注意 "/1 POWER 入門指南 將影院系統和環繞聲放大器的交流電源線連接到牆壁電源插座前,請將前置和中置揚聲器連接 到影院系統 ( 第 17 頁 ),將環繞聲揚聲器連接到環繞聲放大器 ( 第 18 頁 )。 IR 接收器 • 請確保在IR傳送器與環繞聲放大器的IR接收器之 間沒有諸如人或物品等障礙物。否則可能會阻斷 從環繞聲揚聲器發出的聲音。 • 如果 POWER/ON LINE 指示燈以紅色點亮,則表明 傳輸不良。請調整 IR 傳送器和環繞聲放大器的位 置直至 POWER/ON LINE 指示燈轉為綠色。 • 如果 POWER/ON LINE 指示燈以紅色閃爍,則表明 環繞聲放大器的 IR 接收器正在從其他 Sony 無線 產品接收紅外線。請移動 IR 傳送器和 / 或環繞聲 放大器使 POWER/ON LINE 指示燈轉為綠色。 POWER/ON LINE POWER/ON LINE 指示燈 1 按影院系統上的 "/1 鈕和環繞聲放大器上 的 POWER 鈕以打開。 影院系統和環繞聲放大器開啟,POWER/ ON LINE 指示燈以紅色點亮。 2 將 IR 傳送器與環繞聲放大器的 IR 接收器面 對面放置。 請調整位置直至 POWER/ON LINE 指示燈 轉為綠色。 續 29CT 安裝示例 如圖所示放置 IR 傳送器和環繞聲放大器。 安裝時,以直線方向連接 IR 傳送器和環繞聲放大器的 IR 接收器,並調整 IR 傳送器和環繞聲 放大器的方向直至 POWER/ON LINE 指示燈轉為綠色。 頂視圖 中置揚聲器 前置揚聲器 (左) 前置揚聲器 (右) IR 發射器 TV 超低音揚聲器 收聽位置 環繞聲放大器的 IR 接收器 環繞揚聲器(左) 環繞揚聲器(右) 使用 IR 接收器 視揚聲器佈局 (即:將環繞聲放大器面向收聽位置時等)而定,或 IR 傳送器和環繞聲放大器 的 IR 接收器之間有人或其他物品等障礙物,您可用外部 IR 接收器 (提供)來代替。IR 接收 器結構緊湊且易於安裝。 連接 IR 接收器 將 IR 接收器電纜連接至環繞聲放大器的 DIR-R2 插孔。 環繞聲放大器的後部 IR 接收器 SURROUND L SPEAKER SPEAKER SURROUND R DIR-R2 注意 • 當您將 IR 接收器連接至環繞聲放大器時,IR 接收器開啟,而環繞聲放大器的 IR 接收器不會自動開啟。 • 當使用 IR 接收器時,請依照環繞聲放大器 IR 接收器的原則來安裝 IR 接收器。 30CT 將環繞聲放大器懸掛安裝在牆上 1 使用螺絲 (不提供)將安裝底座固定在牆上。 入門指南 根據您佈置揚聲器的意圖,您可以將環繞聲放大器懸掛安裝在牆上。您也可以將環繞聲放大器 連同環繞聲揚聲器一起懸掛在牆上。 安裝底座 2 如圖所示將環繞聲放大器後部開口鉤在安裝底座上。 環繞聲放大器 安裝底座 請確保環繞聲放大器安裝牢固。 注意 • 請使用適合牆面材料和強度的螺絲。 • 切勿將環繞聲放大器懸掛於不堅固的牆面上。 • Sony 對錯誤安裝、牆壁強度不足、違規操作或自然災害所造成的損害和傷害不負任何責任。 • 切勿在環繞聲放大器或環繞聲揚聲器上懸掛或放置任何物品。安裝底座或揚聲器可能掉落,從而導致傷害。 續 31CT 將 IR 發射器和 IR 接收機掛在牆上 以下情況,您可以將 IR 發射器和 IR 接收器掛在牆上: - IR 發射器和 IR 接收器之間有障礙物。 - IR 發射器和 IR 接收器之間經常有人走過。 當 IR 發射器和 IR 接收器都掛在牆上時,在確定 IR 接收器的位置後調整 IR 發射器的位置。 若要將 IR 接收器掛在牆上 若要將 IR 發射器掛在牆上 1 1 將一顆螺絲釘在牆上,並使螺絲突出 4 mm。 轉動 IR 發射器的底座。 IR 發射器 4 mm 底座 2 拆下 IR 接收器底座,然後通過 IR 接收器背 後的孔將接收器掛在螺絲上。 確保 IR 接收器在安裝後不會移動。 2 將 2 顆螺絲釘在牆上,並使螺絲突出 4 mm。 兩顆螺絲相距 30 mm。 IR 接收器 30 mm 4 mm IR 接收器底座 提示 當要將 IR 接收器底座重新裝到 IR 接收器上時,請 將 IR 接收器上的兩個三角標誌與底座上的標誌對 準 ( 第 13 頁 )。 32CT 3 通過底座底部的孔將 IR 發射器掛在螺絲 上。 IR 發射器 • 請使用適合牆體材質和強度的螺絲。 • 切勿將IR發射器和IR接收器安裝在強度不高的牆 上。 • Sony 對於因錯誤安裝 (例如,強度較低的牆體 等)、錯誤使用本產品或自然災害所導致的任何 損失或意外將不承擔責任。 • 在連接/斷開連接導線時,請先將IR發射器或IR接 收器從牆上取下。 入門指南 確保 IR 發射器在安裝後不會移動。 注意 底座 提示 您可以將連接導線儲藏在底座底部的槽內。 底座 槽 33CT 步驟 6:進行快速設定 完成開始 4 個步驟後,用快速設定進行初始設定。您可以逐步進行 [ 語言設定 ]、 [ 房間大小 ]、[ 聆聽位置 ] 和 [ 電視機形式 ] 的初始設定。 進行快速設定後,系統準備播放電影、音樂 CD 等。若要進行具體的揚聲器設定,請參見第 86 頁上的 “揚聲器設定”。 5 使用快速設定的方法 按 ENTER 鍵。 出現 [ 語言設定 ]([LANGUAGE SETUP])。 LANGUAGE SETUP "/1 ENGLISH FRANÇAIS DEUTSCH ITALIANO ESPAÑOL NEDERLANDS DANSK SVENSKA SUOMI PORTUGUÉS FUNCTION C/X/x/c/ ENTER DVD SETUP O RETURN 提示 • 可選擇語言視地區不同而異。 • 在[語言設定]中選擇的語言也使用於[畫面顯 示語言 ]、[DVD 菜單 ] 和 [ 字幕語言 ] 中 ( 第 82 頁 )。 • 視地區不同,語言列表中會出現 [ 其他 t]。這 時,可以從語言代碼一覽表 ( 第 105 頁 ) 選擇 您想要的 [DVD 菜單 ] 和 [ 字幕語言 ] 語言。 用 X/x 鍵選擇 [ 其他 t],然後按 ENTER 鍵。 數字鍵 CLEAR 蓋子打開狀態。 1 2 3 4 打開電視機。 按 "/1 鍵。 按 FUNCTION 鍵選擇 “DVD”。 選中設定,出現 [ 房間大小 ]。 電視機螢幕上出現指南資訊。 注意 當系統中有光碟時,電視機螢幕上不出現指南 資訊。 34CT 6 使用 X/x 鍵選擇語言,然後按 ENTER 鍵。 (當您從語言代碼列表中選擇語言時,使 用數字鍵選擇該語言代碼,然後按 ENTER 鍵。) 將電視機上的輸入選擇器切換到本系統。 7 使用 X/x鍵從[小]、[中]或[大]中選擇合適 的房間大小,然後按 ENTER 鍵。 視設定的 [ 房間大小 ] 而異,可選擇的 [ 聆聽位置 ] 數有所不同。 [ 小 ]:三種位置 [ 中 ]:四種位置 [ 大 ]:五種位置 8 • 如果在指南資訊中按 CLEAR,資訊將消失。如果 需要改變設定,在設定顯示的 [ 設定 ] 中選擇 [ 快速 ]( 第 91 頁 )。 • 如果在 [ 電視機形式 ] 中選擇 [4:3],則 [4:3 信箱 形式 ] 被選定 ( 第 82 頁 )。 • 根據所選 [房間大小 ]和[ 聆聽位置 ],各個揚聲器 的距離和電平被自動設定 ( 第 86 頁 )。 • 如果要改變各個設定請參見第 81 頁上的 “使用 設定顯示”。 • [房間大小]和[聆聽位置]中顯示的圖示僅作為示 例,與實際房間大小以及佈局可能不同。 顯示中不出現 [ 揚聲器設定 ]( 第 86 頁 ) 的設定。 入門指南 選中設定,出現 [ 聆聽位置 ]。 注意 使用 X/x 選擇合適的聆聽位置,然後按 ENTER 鍵。 選中設定,出現 [ 電視機形式 ]。 9 使用 C/c 鍵選擇系統上所連接的電視機形 式,然後按 ENTER 鍵。 快速設定完成。 快速設定完成後被保存,下次打開系統 時指南資訊將不再出現。 如果您操作有誤 按 O RETURN 鍵,然後再次選擇項目。 若要退出快速設定 在任一步中按 DVD SETUP 鍵。 35CT 揚聲器設定 放置揚聲器 為盡可能獲得最佳的環繞聲效果,除超低音 揚聲器外的所有揚聲器都應與聆聽位置距離 相同 (A)。 不過,本系統允許您將中置揚聲器向聆聽位 置最多靠近 1.6 m (B),環繞揚聲器向聆 聽位置最多靠近 4.6 m (C)。 前置揚聲器可以放置在距聆聽位置 1.0m 至 7.0 m 之間 (A)。 如下圖所示放置揚聲器 關於磁屏蔽揚聲器 (防止電視螢幕上出現 色彩不均勻) 本系統中的超低音揚聲器為磁屏蔽型,以防 止漏磁。但是,由於採用了高強度磁體,也 可能發生洩漏。如果超低音揚聲器與陰極射 線管電視機或投影機一起使用,則超低音揚 聲器至少安裝在距電視機 0.3 m 處。如果安 裝距離太近,則螢幕上可能出現色彩不均勻。 如果出現色彩不均勻,請關閉一次電視機, 然後 15 至 30 分鐘後再打開。如果還是出現 色彩不均勻,請將超低音揚聲器放置在距電 視機更遠的位置。如果執行上述操作後仍然 出現色彩不均勻,請確保超低音揚聲器附近 沒有磁性物體。色彩不均勻可能由於超低音 揚聲器和磁性物體之間交互作用而產生的結 果。 可能成為磁干擾源包括:電視機底座上的磁 性門鎖,健身設備,玩具等。 確定揚聲器參數 為盡可能獲得最佳環繞聲效果,應首先確定 揚聲器距聆聽位置的距離,然後設定電平和 平衡。使用測試音調將揚聲器電平和平衡調 節至相同等級。 在設定顯示中選擇 [ 揚聲器設定 ]。詳細說 明,請參見 “揚聲器設定”( 第 86 頁 )。 注意 • 切勿使中置和環繞揚聲器離聆聽位置的距離大於 前置揚聲器到您聆聽位置的距離。 • 當您連接選購的後環繞揚聲器時,將後環繞揚聲 器放置在聆聽位置之後 (如上圖所示放置 (D))。這時,在 [ 尺寸 ] 設定 ( 第 86 頁 ) 中 將 [ 後環繞聲 ] 設定為 [ 是 ],將從後環繞揚聲 器中輸出聲音。 36CT 4 載入光碟。 將光碟推入光碟插槽,直至光碟被自動 拖入。 光碟被自動引入系統,且前面板顯示幕 中出現 “READING”。 播放光碟 播放光碟 播放光碟 播放面朝下 視 DVD 或 VIDEO CD 的不同情況,某些操作方 法可能會有所不同或有所限制。 請參閱光碟附帶的操作說明書。 光碟插槽 "/1 STANDBY 指示燈 Z 調節音量 連接耳機 FUNCTION 5 按遙控器上的 H,或按系統上的 。 系統開始播放 (連續播放)。 在系統上調節音量。 "/1 步驟 5 之後 FUNCTION 視光碟的不同情況,電視機螢幕上可能會出 現一個菜單。您可以根據菜單上的說明交互 式播放光碟。(DVD:第 40 頁),(VIDEO CD: 第 40 頁)。 Z H 若要取出光碟 按 Z 鍵。光碟從系統中排出後即可取出光 碟。“NO DISC”出現在前面板顯示幕上。 若要打開系統電源 1 2 3 打開電視機。 將電視機上的輸入選擇器切換到本系統。 按系統上的 "/1 鍵。系統打開。在待機模式 中,通過載入光碟也能打開系統電源。 按系統上的 "/1 鍵。 系統打開。 除非系統的模式設定為 “DVD”,否則按 FUNCTION 鍵選擇 “DVD”。 前面板顯示幕中出現 “NO DISC”,系統 準備載入光碟。 續 37CT 若要關閉系統電源 按 "/1 鍵。系統進入待機模式,STANDBY 指 示燈點亮為紅色。若要完全關閉系統,請從 電源插頭上拔掉交流電源線。 在播放光碟時,切勿按 "/1 將系統關閉。否 則會取消菜單設定。要關閉系統時,先按 x 停止播放,然後再按 "/1。 附加操作 Z X ./> x H MUTING 在待機模式中省電 VOL +/- 在 系 統 電 源打 開 時 按 "/1 鍵 (系 統 上 的 STANDBY 指示燈亮起)。 若要取消待機模式 按一下 "/1 鍵。 若要 按鍵 停止 x 暫停 * X 暫停後繼續播放 X或H 在連續播放模式下進到下 > 一章、軌跡、場面或檔案 在連續播放模式下回到上 . 一章、軌跡、場面或檔案 停止播放並取出光碟 Z 靜音 MUTING。若要取消靜 音,則再按一次或按 VOL + 調節音量。 * 在 JPEG 播放過程中不能暫停。 注意 • 如果系統中沒有光碟,前面板顯示幕中將出現 “NO DISC”。 • 如果 DVD 播放暫停了大約一小時,則系統將自動 關閉。 提示 如果 DVD 有多個標題,則按 . 或 > 將無法進 到下一個標題或返回前一個標題。這些鍵只有在單 個標題內有效。如果您想要進到下一個標題或返回 前一個標題,則按 DVE TOP MENU 或 DVD MENU,然 後從控制菜單選擇想要到達的標題。 38CT 提示 從停播點恢復播放 若要從光碟的開頭播放,按兩次 x 鍵,然後按 H 鍵。 (恢復播放) H 1 播放光碟 當您停止播放光碟,系統會記憶您按 x 鍵 時的位置,前面板顯示幕上出現“RESUME”。 只要未取出光碟,即使按 "/1 鍵使系統進入 待機模式,恢復播放功能也將工作。 x 在播放光碟時,按 x 鍵停止播放。 前面板顯示幕上出現 “RESUME”,您可 以從停止位置重新開始播放光碟。 如果未出現 “RESUME”,則無法進行恢 復播放。 2 按 H 鍵。 系統從步驟 1 中的停播位置開始播放。 注意 • 在進行隨機播放或編序播放時無法進行恢復播 放。 • 根據光碟的停播位置而定,系統可能不能準確地 從停播位置開始恢復播放。 • 在下列情況下停播位置將被消除: – 改變播放模式。 – 改變設定菜單中的設定。 39CT 使用 DVD 菜單 播放有 PBC 功能的 VIDEO CD (2.0 版) DVD 被分為許多部分,由這些部分編排成一 個影像或音樂特輯。這些部分稱為“標題”。 當播放包括多個標題的 DVD 時,您可以用 DVD TOP MENU/ALBUM- 鍵選擇所要的標題。 當您播放可以選擇字幕語言和聲音語言等項 目的 DVD 時,使用 DVD MENU/ALBUM+ 鍵選擇 這些項目。 DVD TOP MENU/ ALBUM- DVD MENU/ ALBUM+ (PBC 播放) 使用 PBC (播放控制)功能,您可以欣賞到 簡單的交互式操作、搜尋功能和其他類似操 作。 PBC 播放能使您按照電視機螢幕上的菜單,交 互式播放 VIDEO CD。 ./> x H X/x/ ENTER C/X/x/c/ ENTER O RETURN 數字鍵 數字鍵 蓋子打開狀態。 1 按 DVD TOP MENU/ALBUM- 或 DVD MENU/ ALBUM +鍵。 電視機螢幕上出現光碟菜單。 不同的光碟菜單內容也各不相同。 2 按C/X/x/c或數字鍵選擇您要播放或要更 改的項目。 3 按 ENTER 鍵。 注意 如果在 DVD 播放過程中顯示 DVD 頂部菜單或 DVD 菜 單約一小時,系統將自動關閉。 蓋子打開狀態。 1 開始播放有 PBC 功能的 VIDEO CD。 出現供選擇的菜單。 2 3 4 按 X/x 或數字鍵,選擇您要的項目編號。 按 ENTER 鍵。 按照菜單中的說明進行交互操作。 請參閱光碟附帶的說明,因為對於不同 的 VIDEO CD,操作步驟也可能不同。 若要返回菜單 按 O RETURN 鍵。 40CT 注意 • 視 VIDEO CD 而定,在步驟 1 中不出現菜單。 • 視 VIDEO CD 而定,隨光碟附帶的說明書上可能將 步驟 3 中的“按 ENTER 鍵”寫為“按 SELECT 鍵”。 在此情況下,請按 H。 若不使用 PBC 功能播放,則在系統停止時按 ./> 或數字鍵選擇一個軌跡,然後按 H 鍵 或 ENTER 鍵。 電視機螢幕上出現 “不以 PBC 方式播放”,且系統 開始連續播放。您不能播放靜像,如菜單畫面。若 要返回 PBC 播放,按兩次 x 鍵,然後按 H 鍵。 您可以播放 CD-ROM、CD-R、或 CD-RW 中的 MP3 音頻軌跡。但是,為使系統能夠識別這 些軌跡,光碟必須以 ISO9660 level 1、level 2、或 Joliet 格式錄製。您還可以播放以 Multi Session 錄製的光碟。有關錄製格式 的詳細說明,請參見 CD-R/RW 設備或錄製軟 體的說明書 (不提供)。 1 2 播放光碟 提示 播放 MP3 音頻軌跡 將以 MP3 錄製的資料光碟載入系統。 按 H 鍵。 系統開始播放光碟上第一個文件夾中的 第一個 MP3 音頻軌跡。 注意 • 系統可以播放 MP3(MPEG1 Audio Layer 3)音頻。 系統無法播放 MP3PRO 格式的音頻軌跡。 • 當MP3音頻軌跡位於第一話路上時,本系統可以播 放 Multi Session CD。也可以播放錄製在以後話 路上的所有隨後 MP3 音頻軌跡。 • 一張光碟中文件夾的最大數量:99 (一個文件夾 中能含有的 MP3 音頻軌跡的最大數量為 250。) • 不含 MP3 音頻軌跡的文件夾將被跳過。 • 如果您將副檔名 “.MP3”寫在非 MP3 格式的資料 後面,則系統無法正確識別資料,且將產生會損 壞揚聲器系統的巨大噪音。 • 如果系統無法播放 MP3,將[個人設定]中的[ 資料 光碟優先 ] 設定為 [MP3]( 第 85 頁 )。 • 本系統能播放到 8 個目錄的深度,包括一個根目 錄。 續 41CT 4 選擇文件夾和軌跡 使用 X/x 鍵選擇 按 ENTER 鍵。 (軌跡),然後 出現當前文件夾中所含的軌跡列表。 HOME TOWN ROCK BEST HIT DVD TOP MENU/ ALBUM- DVD MENU/ ALBUM+ C/X/x/c/ ENTER DVD DISPLAY 1 O RETURN 當視窗中無法顯示所有的軌跡或文件夾 列表時,則出現跳躍條。按 c 選擇跳躍 條圖示,然後用 X/x 捲動跳躍條顯示列 表的剩餘部分。按 C 鍵或 O RETURN 返 回軌跡或文件夾列表。 按 DVD DISPLAY 鍵。 出現控制菜單和 MP3 資料光碟的名稱。 2 按 X/x 鍵選擇 使用 X/x 鍵選擇軌跡,然後按 ENTER 鍵。 開始播放所選擇的軌跡。 按 ENTER 鍵或 c 鍵。 若要返回至先前的顯示 出現光碟中所含的文件夾列表。 按 O RETURN 或 C。 MP3 ROCK BEST HIT KARAOKE JAZZ R&B MY FAVORITE SONGS CLASSICAL SALSA OF CUBA BOSSANOVA 3 5 (文件夾),然後 HOME TOWN MP3 1.HIGHWAY 2.VIEW POINT 3.MY CHILDREN 4.DANCING 5.GOOD TASTE 6.DESTINATION 7.MARATHON 8.PLACE-KICK 9.TAKE IT EASY 10.PORT TOWER 11.STANDARD 使用X/x鍵選擇想要播放的文件夾,然後按 ENTER 鍵。 若要關閉顯示 按 DVD DISPLAY 鍵。 注意 • 文件夾或軌跡名稱中只能包含字母和數字。任何 其他字元顯示為 “ ”。 • 如果您所播放的 MP3 檔案具有 ID3 標誌,則 ID3 標 誌資訊將作為軌跡名稱顯示。 • ID3 標誌僅適用於版本 1。 • 如果播放 VBR(可變比特率)MP3 檔案,已播放時 間指示可能與實際時間有差異。 • 直至播放光碟或在步驟 2 中選擇了文件夾,控制 菜單中的文件夾名稱將顯示為 “**ALBUM” (** 代表數字),之後是文件夾名稱。 提示 當插入了 MP3 資料光碟,您可以用遙控器上的 DVD MENU/ALBUM+ 或 DVD TOP MENU/ALBUM- 選擇文件夾。 42CT 播放 JPEG 影像檔案 選擇文件夾和檔案 1 2 DVD TOP MENU/ ALBUM- 播放光碟 您可以播放 CD-ROM、CD-R、或 CD-RW 中的 JPEG 影像檔案。但是,為使系統能夠識別這 些檔案,光碟必須以 ISO9660 level 1、level 2、或 Joliet 格式錄製。您還可以播放以 Multi Session 錄製的光碟。有關錄製格式 的詳細說明,請參見 CD-R/RW 設備或錄製軟 體的說明書 (不提供)。 DVD MENU/ ALBUM+ C/X/x/c/ ENTER DVD DISPLAY O RETURN 將以 JPEG 錄製的資料光碟載入系統。 按 H 鍵。 系統開始播放光碟上第一個文件夾中的 第一個 JPEG 影像檔案。 注意 • 系統可以播放“.JPG”或“.JPEG”副檔名檔案。 • 本系統可以播放 Multi Session CD。 • 不含有 JPEG 檔案的文件夾將被跳過。 • 如果系統無法播放JPEG,將[個人設定]中的[資料 光碟優先 ] 設定為 [JPEG]( 第 85 頁 )。 • 無法播放長度或寬度超過 4,720 點的 JPEG 影像檔 案。 • 無法播放寬高比極大的 JPEG 影像檔案。 • 視光碟格式而定,一些CD-R或CD-RW不能在本系統 上播放。 • 本系統能播放到 8 個目錄的深度,包括一個根目 錄。 • 本系統不能播放逐行 JPEG 影像檔案。 • 光碟上文件夾的最大數量:99 (一個文件夾中能含有的 JPEG 影像檔案的最大數 量為 250。) 提示 如果要進到下一個檔案或返回到前一個檔案,按 . 或 >。 1 按 DVD DISPLAY 鍵。 出現控制菜單和 JPEG 資料光碟的名稱。 2 按 X/x 鍵選擇 (文件夾),然後 按 ENTER 鍵或 c 鍵。 出現光碟中所含的文件夾列表。 MOUNTAIN JPEG FAMILY FLOWER GARDEN TRAIN CAR 3 使用 X/x 鍵選擇想要播放的文件夾,然後 按 ENTER 鍵。 4 使用 X/x 選擇 ENTER 鍵。 (檔案),然後按 出現當前文件夾中所含的檔案列表。 MOUNTAIN FAMILY JPEG 1.HAPPY 2.BIRTHDAY 3.CELEBRATION 4.CHRISTMAS 5.MOM 6.BASEBALL 7.PARTY 8.DAD 9.TRAVEL 10.FRIEND 11.DRIVE 當視窗中無法顯示所有的檔案或文件夾 列表,則出現跳躍條。按 c 選擇跳躍條 圖示,然後用 X/x 捲動跳躍條顯示列表 的剩餘部分。按 C 鍵或 O RETURN 返回 檔案或文件夾列表。 續 43CT 5 使用 X/x 鍵選擇檔案,然後按 ENTER 鍵。 開始播放所選擇的檔案。 在 JPEG 資料光碟上欣賞幻燈片放映 若要返回至先前的顯示 按 O RETURN 或 C。 若要關閉顯示 M H 按 DVD DISPLAY 鍵。 注意 • 文件夾或檔案名稱中只能包含字母和數字。任何 其他字元顯示為 “ ”。 • 直至播放光碟或在步驟2中選擇了文件夾,控制菜 單中的文件夾名稱將顯示為 “**ALBUM”(** 代 表數字),之後是文件夾名稱。 提示 當插入了 JPEG 資料光碟,您可以用遙控器上的 DVD MENU/ALBUM+ 或 DVD TOP MENU/ALBUM- 選擇文件夾。 1 播放 JPEG 影像時按 M 鍵。 從當前影像開始幻燈片放映。 2 當您想要結束幻燈片放映時按 H 鍵。 從當前影像恢復正常放映。 若要更改幻燈片放映的間隔時間 在幻燈片放映時每按一次 M 鍵,間隔時間 發生改變。每按一次,指示如下改變: t 1M t 2M t 3M 3M 間隔時間比 2M 快。 注意 幻燈片放映只能按一個方向播放。 44CT 若要轉動當前影像 創建自己的編序 (編序播放) C/c 您可以通過排列光碟中軌跡和文件夾的順 序,建立自己的編序,即可按照您想要的順 序播放光碟的內容。您最多可編序 25 個軌跡 和文件夾。 播放光碟 H H 使用 C/c 轉動當前影像。 每按一次 c,影像順時針轉動 90°。 每按一次 C,影像逆時針轉動 90°。 C/X/x/c/ ENTER O RETURN 注意 REPEAT 在幻燈片放映中不能轉動影像。在本操作之前先按 H 鍵返回正常播放。 PLAY MODE 數字鍵 CLEAR 蓋子打開狀態。 1 在停止模式中,反覆按 PLAY MODE 鍵,直至 前面板顯示幕上出現 “PGM”。 電視機螢幕上出現編序菜單。 例如,在 MP3 光碟上選擇一個軌跡。 Program 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Total Time - - : - - 若要查看已經建立的軌跡或文件夾,按 C 選擇跳躍條圖示,然後用X/x捲動跳躍 條顯示列表的剩餘部 分。按 c 或 O RETURN 返回到軌跡或文件夾列表。 編序的軌跡或文件夾達 9 個以上時才可 以選擇跳躍條圖示。 續 45CT 2 按 c 鍵。 若要返回正常播放 游標移至某一軌跡 (此時為 “1”)。在 編序 MP3 軌跡之前,需要選擇文件夾。 在停止模式中,反覆按 PLAY MODE 鍵,直至 前面板顯示幕上 “PGM”消失。 Program 1 Album 2 1 ALBUM Track 3 2 ALBUM ALL TRACKS 4 3 ALBUM 1 TRACK1 5 4 ALBUM 2 TRACK2 6 5 ALBUM 3 TRACK3 7 4 TRACK4 8 5 TRACK5 9 6 TRACK6 10 7 TRACK7 8 TRACK8 9 TRACK9 Total Time - - : - - 選擇您想要編序的軌跡。 例如,選擇軌跡 “7”。 Program 1 Album 2 1 ALBUM Track 3 2 ALBUM ALL TRACKS 4 3 ALBUM 1 TRACK1 5 4 ALBUM 2 TRACK2 6 5 ALBUM 3 TRACK3 7 4 TRACK4 8 5 TRACK5 9 6 TRACK6 10 7 TRACK7 8 TRACK8 9 TRACK9 4 Total Time - - : - - 按 X/x 鍵或數字鍵選擇“7” ,然後按 ENTER 鍵。 編序軌跡的總時間(MP3除外) Program 1 ALBUM 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 5 Total Time - - : - TRACK 7 若要編序其他軌跡,則重複步驟 2 至 4。 編序的軌跡按選擇順序顯示。 6 按 H 鍵開始編序播放。 編序播放開始。 當編序播放結束時,您可以按 H 鍵重 新開始播放同一個編序。 46CT 若要 操作 關閉編序菜單 在停止模式中,按 PLAY MODE 即 可關閉編序菜單。 取消已編序的順 在步驟 5 中按 CLEAR 鍵,從最後 序 一個編序開始逐個取消。 若要選擇視窗中沒有顯示的軌跡,按 c 選擇跳躍條圖示,然後用 X/x 捲動跳躍 條顯示列表的剩餘部分。按 C 鍵或 O RETURN 返回軌跡列表。 編序的軌跡達 9 個以上時才可以選擇跳 躍條圖示。 3 其他操作 注意 • 本編序播放功能對 DVD 和 JPEG 無效。 • 當您取出光碟,編序播放將被取消,您所建立的 編序也將被清除。 • 編序 MP3 軌跡時,“- - : - -”顯示已編序軌跡 的總時間。 提示 您可以進行編序軌跡的重複播放。在編序播放中, 按 REPEAT 鍵,或將控制菜單顯示中的 [ 重複 ] 設 定為 [ 全部 ]( 第 48 頁 )。 在控制菜單中設定隨機模式 隨機播放 您既可以選擇普通隨機播放,也可以選擇文 件夾隨機播放 (僅適用 MP3)。 (隨機播放) 播放光碟 您可以讓系統 “打亂”軌跡的順序,並以隨 機順序播放。再次 “打亂”會產生不同的播 放順序。 H C/X/x/c/ ENTER DVD DISPLAY H 1 按 DVD DISPLAY 鍵。 出現控制菜單。 PLAY MODE 2 按 X/x 鍵選擇 (PLAY MODE) ,然 後按 ENTER 鍵或 c 鍵。 蓋子打開狀態。 1 在停止模式中,反覆按 PLAY MODE 鍵,直至 前面板顯示幕上出現 “SHUF”。 播放 MP3 光碟時,您可以以隨機順序播 放文件夾中的全部軌跡。 有關文件夾隨機播放的詳細說明,請參 見第 47 頁。 2 3 [ 隨機 ]:隨機播放光碟中的軌跡。 [ 隨機 (文件夾)]:從所選擇的文件夾 開始隨機播放軌跡。 按 H 鍵。 若要返回正常播放 在停止模式中,反覆按 PLAY MODE 鍵,直至 前面板顯示幕上 “SHUF”消失。(隨機被取 消)可同樣操作取消隨機 (文件夾)。 使用 X/x 鍵選擇 [ 隨機 ] 或 [ 隨機 (文件夾)],然後按 ENTER 鍵。 4 按 H 鍵。 開始所選擇的隨機播放。 注意 當您排出光碟時隨機播放即被取消。播放模式按下 列順序改變: 隨機 t 連續 隨機 (文件夾) t 連續 (文件夾) 47CT x 當播放 DVD 時 重複播放 • • • • (重複播放) 關:不重複播放。 全部:重複播放所有標題。 標題:重複播放光碟上當前標題。 章:重複播放當前章。 x 當播放 VIDEO CD/Super Audio CD/CD/ MP3,以及當編序播放設定為 “關”時 您可以播放光碟中所有標題 / 軌跡 / 檔案或 單個標題 / 章 / 軌跡。 在隨機或編序播放模式中,系統按隨機或編 序的順序重複播放軌跡。 在 VIDEO CD 的 PBC 播放過程中不能進行重複 播放 ( 第 40 頁 )。 • 關:不重複播放。 • 全部:重複播放光碟上所有軌跡, 或重複播放當前文件夾 (只有在播 放模式中選擇了連續 (文件夾)或 隨機 (文件夾))。 • 軌跡:重複播放當前軌跡。 x 當播放 JPEG 時 • 關:不重複播放。 • 全部:重複播放光碟上的所有檔案 (當在播放模式中選擇連續),或重 複播放當前文件夾 (當在播放模式 中選擇連續 (文件夾))。 H C/X/x/c/ ENTER x 當編序播放設定為 “開” DVD DISPLAY • 關:不重複播放。 • 全部:重複編序播放。 REPEAT 注意 • 視 DVD 光碟而定,重複播放可能不起作用。 • 當您排出光碟時重複播放即被取消。 • 如果選擇 [ 全部 ],重複播放限制為 5 次。 蓋子打開狀態。 1 按 DVD DISPLAY 鍵。 出現控制菜單。 2 按 X/x 鍵選擇 (重複),然後按 ENTER 鍵或 c 鍵。 如果您未選擇 [ 關 ],則 [ 重複 ] 指示燈 點亮為綠色。 3 48CT 選擇重複播放設定,然後按 ENTER 鍵。 提示 • 您可以在停止模式中設定重複播放。 選擇 [ 重複 ] 項目後,按 H 鍵。 系統開始重複播放。 • 您可以快速顯示 [ 重複 ] 狀態。 按遙控器上的 REPEAT 鍵。 • 您可以對含有章的 DVD 標題執行重複播放。 搜尋光碟上的特定點 若 要改變掃描 速度 (僅適用 DVD/VIDEO CD) 掃描時,每按一次 m 或 M 鍵,播放速度 將發生改變。有兩種速度可供使用。每按一 次,指示如下改變: 您可以通過監視影像或慢速播放來快速找到 光碟上某個特定點。 播放方向 1M t 2M t 播放光碟 (掃描,慢動作播放) SLOW / m/M t H 相反方向 1m t 2m 2M/2m 播放速度比 1M/1m 快。 逐幀觀看 (慢動作播放) (僅適用 DVD/VIDEO CD) 當系統處在暫停模式時按 或 鍵。 注意 若要恢復正常播放速度,按 H 鍵。 • 視 DVD/VIDEO CD 而定,可能無法進行所介紹的一 些操作。 • 在掃描或慢動作播放中,沒有聲音輸出。 若要改變慢動作播放速度 播放光碟時按 m 或 M 鍵。 當您找到所要的點,按 H 鍵恢復正常播放 速度。 t 1 2 播放方向 2 t1 相反方向 (僅適用 DVD) 2 t1 t 用快進或快退播放光碟來快速尋找某 個點 (掃描) 慢動作播放時,您每按一次 或 鍵, 播放速度將發生改變。有兩種速度可供使用。 每按一次,指示如下改變: 2 /2 播放速度比 1 /1 慢。 49CT x 當播放 DVD 時 搜尋標題 / 章 / 軌跡 / 索 引 / 文件夾 / 檔案 (標題) x 當播放 VIDEO CD 時 (軌跡) x 當播放 Super Audio CD 時 (軌跡) 您可以搜尋標題 (DVD)、章 (DVD)、軌跡 (CD、VIDEO CD、Super Audio CD、MP3)、索 引 (VIDEO CD、Super Audio CD)、文件夾 (MP3、JPEG)和檔案 (JPEG)。由於標題、 軌跡、文件夾和檔案在光碟上有分配的唯一 編號,您可以從控制菜單選擇想要的內容。 同樣由於章和索引在光碟上有分配的唯一編 號,以此也可以通過輸入編號選擇所需的內 容。另外,您還可以使用時間編碼來搜尋特 定的點 (時間搜尋)。 您可以選擇 VIDEO CD 中的一個場面(PBC 功 能開啟時)。 x 當播放 CD 時 (軌跡) x 當播放 MP3 時 (文件夾)或 (軌跡) x 當顯示 JPEG 檔案時 (文件夾)或 例如:當您選擇 (軌跡) 出現光碟中所含的軌跡列表。 CD O RETURN DVD DISPLAY 當視窗中無法顯示所有的軌跡或文件夾 列表時,則出現跳躍條。按 c 選擇跳躍 條圖示,然後用 X/x 捲動跳躍條顯示列 表的剩餘部分。按 C 鍵或 O RETURN 返 回軌跡或文件夾列表。 數字鍵 CLEAR CD 搜尋標題 / 軌跡 / 文件夾 / 檔案 按 DVD DISPLAY 鍵。 出現控制菜單。 50CT 按 X/x 鍵選擇搜尋方法,然後按 ENTER 鍵 或 c 鍵。 CD 13.STAY 14.BAD 15.BEAUTIFUL 16.HOLD.ME 17.FIRST TIME 18.BLUE SKY 19.OUR EARTH 20.NO NAME 21.SWEETEST 22.KISS ME 23.FIRE 24.ANGEL 蓋子打開狀態。 2 CD 1.HIGHWAY 2.VIEW POINT 3.MY CHILDREN 4.DANCING 5.GOOD TASTE 6.DESTINATION 7.MARATHON 8.PLACE-KICK 9.TAKE IT EASY 10.PORT TOWER 11.STANDARD 12.LADY C/X/x/c/ ENTER 1 (檔案) 3 按 X/x 選擇想要的軌跡,然後按 ENTER 鍵。 系統從選定的軌跡開始播放。 5 搜尋章 / 索引 1 系統從選定的編號開始播放。 按 DVD DISPLAY 鍵。 注意 出現控制菜單。 當播放帶 PBC 功能的 VIDEO CD 時,索引搜尋功能 無效。 按 X/x 選擇搜索方法。 若要關閉控制菜單 x 當播放 DVD 時 反覆按 DVD DISPLAY 鍵直至控制菜單關閉。 (章) x 當播放 VIDEO CD 時 (不帶 PBC 功能) (索引) 若要用時間編碼搜尋特定點 (時間搜尋) 例如:如果您搜尋 DVD 中當前標題的播放時 間 x 當播放 Super Audio CD 時 (索引) 1 例如:當您選擇 (章) 選擇 “** (**)”(** 代表數字)。 括號內的數字表示章或索引總數。 DVD 1 2 ( 2 7 ) TITLE12 18(34) T 1:32:55 播放光碟 2 按 ENTER 鍵。 DVD 在步驟 2 中選擇 (時間)。 “T **:**:**”(當前標題的播放時間)被選 擇。 2 按 ENTER 或 c 鍵。 “T--:--:--”變為 “T**:**:**”。 3 使用數字鍵輸入時間編碼,然後按 ENTER 鍵。 例如,要尋找開始後 2 小時 10 分 20 秒的點, 只要輸入 “2:10:20”。 注意 3 按 ENTER 或 c 鍵。 “** (**)”改變為 “- - (**)”。 DVD 1 2 ( 2 7 ) TITLE12 ––(34) T 1:32:55 4 DVD • 標題、章或軌跡編號顯示與光碟上錄製的編號相 同。 • VIDEO CD 的時間搜尋功能無效(當 PBC 功能開啟 時)。 • 如果播放 DVD,請用時間代碼輸入當前標題的播放 時間。如果播放 CD、Super Audio CD、VIDEO CD 或 MP3,則使用時間代碼輸入當前軌跡的播放時 間。 提示 您可以更改顯示畫面以顯示播放時間或剩餘時間。 詳細說明,請參見查看 “查看播放時間和剩餘時 間”( 第 54 頁 )。 按 X/x 或數字鍵選擇您要搜尋的章或索引 編號。 如果您操作有誤 按 CLEAR 取消該數字,然後選擇另一個 數字。 51CT 檢視光碟資訊 播放 DVD 時 當前標題的播放時間和編號 TITLE 在前面板顯示幕上檢視播放時間和剩 餘時間 您可以使用前面板顯示幕檢查光碟資訊,如 剩餘時間、DVD 中的總標題數,或 Super Audio CD、CD、VIDEO CD 或 MP3 中的軌跡數 ( 第 100 頁 )。 CHAP 當前標題的剩餘時間和編號 TITLE CHAP 當前章的播放時間和編號 CHAP 當前章的播放時間和編號 DISPLAY CHAP 標題名稱 按 DISPLAY 鍵。 在播放光碟時,每按一次 DISPLAY 鍵,顯示 根據圖表中的顯示改變。 52CT 當前聲場 當播放 VIDEO CD (無 PBC 功能)、Super Audio CD 或 CD 時 當播放 MP3 時 播放時間和當前軌跡編號 播放時間和當前軌跡編號 TRK TRK 播放光碟 當前軌跡的剩餘時間 剩餘時間和當前軌跡編號 TRK TRK 軌跡 (檔案)名稱 光碟的播放時間 文件夾 (資料夾)名稱 光碟的剩餘時間 當前聲場 軌跡名稱 播放 JPEG 時 當前聲場 當前檔案編號 檔案名稱 文件夾 (資料夾)名稱 當前聲場 續 53CT 注意 • 視正在播放的光碟類型和播放模式而定,光碟資 訊可能不顯示。 • ID3 標誌僅適用於版本 1。 • 如果您所播放的MP3檔案具有ID3標誌,則ID3標誌 資訊將作為軌跡 (檔案)名稱顯示。 • 文件夾、軌跡或檔案名稱中只能包含字母和數字。 任何其他字元顯示為 “ ”。 • 在下列情況中,已播放時間和當前軌跡剩餘時間 可能顯示不精確。 – 當播放 VBR (可變比特率)MP3 檔案時。 查看播放時間和剩餘時間 您可以查看當前標題、章或軌跡的播放時間 和剩餘時間,以及光碟的總播放時間和剩餘 時 間。您 可 以 查 看 光 碟 上 錄 製 的 DVD/CD/ Super Audio CD 文字和 MP3 資料夾名稱 / 檔 案名稱 /ID3 標誌 (僅適用歌曲標題)。 DISPLAY 提示 • 當播放帶PBC功能的VIDEO CD時,僅顯示場面的播 放時間。 • 當前章、標題、軌跡、場面或光碟的播放時間和 剩餘時間也會出現在電視機螢幕上。關於如何理 解上述資訊,請參閱下節 “查看播放時間和剩餘 時間”。 DVD DISPLAY 1 播放時按 DVD DISPLAY 鍵。 出現控制菜單。 DVD 1 2 ( 2 7 ) TITLE12 18(34) T 1:32:55 DVD 光碟類型 時間資訊 2 反覆按 DISPLAY 鍵改變時間資訊。 您可以查看的顯示和時間類型將視您正 在播放的光碟而定。 x 當播放 DVD 時 • T **:**:** 當前標題的播放時間 • T “_” *:**:** 當前標題的剩餘時間 • C **:**:** 當前章的播放時間 • C “_” *:**:** 當前章的剩餘時間 • **:**:** 菜單或當前無章標題的播放時間 x 當播放 VIDEO CD 時 (帶 PBC 功能) • **:** 當前場面的播放時間 54CT x 當播放 VIDEO CD(無 PBC 功能)、Super Audio CD 或 CD 時 查看日期資訊 (僅適用 JPEG) 如果 JPEG 影像資料中錄有 Exif* 標誌,則在 播放過程中您可以查看日期資訊。 播放光碟 • T **:** 當前軌跡的播放時間 • T “_” *:** 當前軌跡的剩餘時間 • D **:** 當前光碟的播放時間 • D “_” *:** 當前光碟的剩餘時間 x 當播放 MP3 時 • T **:** 當前軌跡的播放時間 • T “_” *:** 當前軌跡的剩餘時間 DVD DISPLAY 若要關閉控制菜單 反覆按 DVD DISPLAY 鍵直至控制菜單關閉。 播放時按 DVD DISPLAY 鍵。 注意 出現控制菜單。 • 只能顯示字母和數字。 • 視正在播放的光碟類型而定,系統只能顯示有限 的字元數。同樣視光碟而定,並不是所有的文字 字元都被顯示。 MOUNTAIN FAMILY 1 ( 2 0 ) BIRTHDAY JPEG 01 / 01/ 2004 日期資訊 * “可交換影像檔案格式”是由日本電子與資訊 技術行業協會定義的數位照相機影像格式 (JEITA)。 注意 如果光碟中沒有日期資訊或資料被破壞,則系統無 法顯示日期資訊。 提示 您可以在 [ 個人設定 ] 的 [JPEG 日期 ] 中更改日期 資訊順序 ( 第 85 頁 )。 55CT 2 按 X/x 鍵選擇 (聲音),然後按 ENTER 鍵或 c 鍵。 聲音調節 出現 “聲音”選項。 改變聲音 如果 DVD 是用多語言軌跡錄製,則您可以在 播放 DVD 時選擇您想要的語言。 如果 DVD 用多種音頻格式 (PCM、Dolby Digital、MPEG 音頻或 DTS)錄製,您可以 在播放 DVD 時選擇您想要的音頻格式。 對於立體聲 CD、VIDEO CD 或 MP3,您可以選 擇右聲道或左聲道聲音,並通過左右揚聲器 收聽所選擇聲道的聲音 (這時無立體聲音 效)。例如,當播放的光碟上歌曲為右聲道 錄製了歌唱聲,左聲道錄製了樂器聲,您可 以選擇左聲道並從兩個揚聲器中只聽樂器 聲。 3 按 X/x 選擇想要的音頻訊號。 x 當播放 DVD 時 視 DVD 而定,語言選擇將有所不同。 當顯示四位數字時,這表示語言代碼。 請查閱第 105 頁上的語言代碼一覽表, 以了解代碼所代表的語言。當相同語言 顯示兩次或兩次以上,則說明該 DVD 是 以多音頻格式錄製的。 x 當播放 VIDEO CD、CD 或 MP3 時 預設設定有下划線。 • STEREO:標準立體聲 • 1/L:左聲道聲音 (單聲道) • 2/R:右聲道聲音 (單聲道) x 當播放 Super Audio CD 時 C/X/x/c/ ENTER DVD DISPLAY 在停止模式中,視 Super Audio CD 而 定,設定的選擇將有差異。 • MULTI:光碟具有多聲道播放區域。 • 2CH:光碟具有 2 聲道播放區域。 • CD:當您想要將光碟作為常規 CD 播 放時。 AUDIO 注意 • 當播放 Super Audio CD 時,並不是所有光碟都 有以上三種選擇。所有這些都將視想要播放的 Super Audio CD 的層配置而定。 • 在 2 聲道播放區域或者 2 CHANNEL STEREO 模式中播放 Super Audio CD 時,環繞聲放大 器的 POWER/ON LINE 指示燈變為紅色。 蓋子打開狀態。 1 播放時按 DVD DISPLAY 鍵。 顯示控制菜單。 4 56CT 按 ENTER 鍵。 若要關閉控制菜單 以下為顯示示例: 反覆按 DVD DISPLAY 鍵直至控制菜單關閉。 • PCM (立體聲) 注意 PROGRAM FORMAT • 對於非多音頻格式的光碟,您無法改變聲音。 • 在 DVD 播放過程中,聲音可能會自動改變。 PCM 48kHz 24bit • Dolby Surround 提示 PROGRAM FORMAT DOLBY DIGITAL 2/0 DOLBY SURROUND 顯示光碟音頻資訊 (僅適用 DVD) 當您選擇 [ 聲音語言 ] 時,正在播放的聲道 顯示在螢幕上。 例如,在 Dolby Digital 格式中,從單聲道 到5.1聲道訊號的多種訊號都可以錄製在DVD 上。視 DVD 而定,所錄製聲道的數量可能不 相同。 當前音頻格式 * • Dolby Digital 5.1 聲道 聲音調節 您可以按 AUDIO 鍵直接選擇 [ 聲音語言 ]。您每按 一次該鍵,項目將改變。 PROGRAM FORMAT DOLBY DIGITAL 3/2.1 • DTS PROGRAM FORMAT DTS 3/2.1 提示 • 當訊號包含環繞訊號分量,如 LS、RS 或 S 時,環繞 聲效果將增強。 • 如果播放 MPEG AUDIO 聲音軌跡,系統將輸出 PCM (立體聲)訊號。 • 即使音頻流包含一個環繞後分量,也不顯示環繞 後聲道。 Dolby Digital-EX 或 DTS-ES 聲源在螢幕上顯示 為 “3/2.1”。 * 顯示 [PCM]、[MPEG]、[DTS] 或 [DOLBY DIGITAL]。 對於 [DOLBY DIGITAL],播放軌跡中的聲 道以數字顯示如下: 對於 Dolby Digital 5.1 聲道: 環繞分量 2 DOLBY DIGITAL 3 / 2 . 1 前置分量 2+ 中置分量 1 LFE(低頻效果 )分量 1 57CT 欣賞環繞聲 您只要選擇系統預編聲場中的一個聲場,便 能利用環繞聲。這些聲場將把電影院中動人 和強有力的聲音帶到您的家中。 若要選擇聲場,反覆按遙控器上的 AUTO FORMAT DIRECT 鍵或 MODE 鍵直至前面板顯示 幕上出現您需要的聲場。 音頻輸入訊號的自動解碼 (AUTO FORMAT DIRECT AUTO) 音頻解碼功能自動檢測輸入音頻訊號的類型 (Dolby Digital、DTS 或標準 2 聲道立體 聲),並根據需要進行正確的解碼。此模式 僅呈現錄製 / 編碼時的聲音,並未增加任何 效果 (如回響)。 但是,如果沒有低頻訊號 (Dolby Digital LFE 等訊號),此模式將產生一個低頻訊號輸 出至超低音揚聲器。 提示 如果您要從系統的 6 個揚聲器中輸出電視機聲音或 2 聲道音源的立體聲聲音,則選擇除“AUTO FORMAT DIRECT AUTO”或 “2 CHANNEL STEREO”以外的聲 場。 AUTO FORMAT DIRECT 蓋子打開狀態。 反覆按 AUTO FORMAT DIRECT 鍵,直至前面板顯 示幕中出現 “A.F.D AUTO”。 58CT 聲場 顯示 AUTO FORMAT DIRECT AUTO A.F.D. AUTO 僅使用前置揚聲器和超低音揚聲器 (2 CHANNEL STEREO) 選擇聲場(AUTO FORMAT DIRECT 鍵) 聲音調節 此模式從前置左右揚聲器和超低音揚聲器輸 出聲音。標準兩聲道 (立體聲)音源完全繞 過聲場處理。多聲道環繞格式被混合成兩個 聲道。 這能讓您只使用前置左右揚聲器和超低音揚 聲器播放任何音源。 AUTO FORMAT DIRECT MODE 蓋子打開狀態。 反覆按 AUTO FORMAT DIRECT 鍵,直至您想要的 聲場出現在前面板顯示幕中。 聲場 顯示 AUTO FORMAT DIRECT PRO LOGIC DOLBY PL 反覆按 MODE 鍵,直至前面板顯示幕中出現 “2CH STEREO”。 AUTO FORMAT DIRECT PRO LOGIC II MOVIE PLII MOVIE 聲場 顯示 AUTO FORMAT DIRECT PRO LOGIC II MUSIC PLII MUSIC 2 CHANNEL STEREO 2CH STEREO Neo:6 CINEMA NEO:6 CIN Neo:6 MUSIC NEO:6 MUS 蓋子打開狀態。 x AUTO FORMAT DIRECT PRO LOGIC Dolby Pro Logic 能從兩聲道音源產生出五 個 輸 出 聲 道。此 模 式 對 輸 入 訊 號 進 行 Pro Logic 解碼,並輸出至前置、中置和環繞揚 聲器。同時,環繞聲道將成為單聲道。 x AUTO FORMAT DIRECT PRO LOGICII MOVIE/ MUSIC Dolby Pro Logic II 能從兩聲道音源產生出 五個全帶寬輸出聲道。這是採用先進的、高 純度矩陣環繞解碼器,不新增任何新的聲音 或音調著色獲得原始錄音的空間特性。 x Neo:6 CINEMA 進行 DTS Neo:6 電影院模式解碼。 x Neo:6 MUSIC 續 59CT 進行 DTS Neo:6 音樂模式解碼。此設定是欣 賞標準立體聲音源的理想選擇,如 CD。 選擇聲場 (MODE 鍵) 注意 • 當輸入訊號為多聲道音源時,PRO LOGIC、PRO LOGIC II MOVIE/MUSIC 和 Neo:6 電影院 / 音樂 將被取消,且多聲道音源將直接輸出。 • Neo:6 電影院 / 音樂模式解碼對 DTS 2 聲道訊號無 效。 • 本系統與 DTS 96/24 解碼功能不相容。當您播放 DTS 96/24 光碟時,系統將其作為普通光碟播放。 MODE 蓋子打開狀態。 反覆按 MODE 鍵,直至您想要的聲場出現在前面 板顯示幕中。 播放電影 聲場 顯示 CINEMA STUDIO EX A C. ST. EX A* CINEMA STUDIO EX B C. ST. EX B* CINEMA STUDIO EX C C. ST. EX C* * 使用 DCS 技術 關於 DCS (數位電影院音響) 在與 Sony Pictures Entertainment 合作中, Sony 測量了他們錄音室的聲音環境,並綜合 了測量的資料和 Sony 自己的 DSP(數位訊號 處理器)技術,研發了“數位電影院音響”。 “數位電影院音響”以電影導演的喜好為基 礎,仿造出家庭影院理想的劇場音響環境。 x C. ST. EX A ( 電影院錄音室 EX A) 再現了 Sony Pictures Entertainment“Cary Grant Theater”電影院製作錄音室的音響特 性。這是一個標準模式,主要用於觀看大多 數類型的電影。 x C. ST. EX B ( 電影院錄音室 EX B) 再現了 Sony Pictures Entertainment“Kim Novak Theater”電影院製作錄音室的音響特 性。此模式是觀看具有許多音響效果的科幻 片或動作片的理想選擇。 60CT 播放音樂或其他 再現了 Sony Pictures Entertainment 配樂 舞台的音響特性。此模式是觀看以聲道為特 點的音樂劇或古典電影的理想選擇。 聲場 顯示 HALL HALL 關於 Cinema Studio EX JAZZ CLUB JAZZ CLUB Cinema Studio EX 是欣賞具有多聲道格式編 碼的電影軟體的理想選擇,如 Dolby Digital DVD。此模式可再現 Sony Pictures Entertainment 錄音室的音響特性。 Cinema Studio EX 由以下三個要素組成。 • 虛擬多維 由一對真實的環繞揚聲器創造出 5 組虛擬 揚聲器圍繞在收聽者的周圍。 • 畫面深度對比 在電影院中,聲音好似從反射在電影螢幕上 的影像內部傳出。此要素通過將前置揚聲器 的聲音 “移動到”螢幕中,從而在您聆聽 的房間內創造出相同的感覺。 • 電影院錄音室回響 再現了電影院獨特的回響。Cinema Studio EX 是同時操作這些要素的組合模式。 LIVE CONCERT L. CONCERT GAME GAME SPORTS SPORTS MONO MOVIE MONO MOVIE 注意 仿造競技場或運動場聲音。 • 虛擬揚聲器效果可能會增加播放訊號中的噪音。 • 當使用通過虛擬揚聲器的聲場收聽時,將無法直 接從環繞揚聲器中聽到任何聲音。 x MONO MOVIE (單聲道電影) 聲音調節 x C. ST. EX C ( 電影院錄音室 EX C) x HALL (大廳) 再現了長方形音樂會大廳的音響效果。 x JAZZ CLUB (爵士俱樂部) 再現了爵士俱樂部的音響效果。 x L. CONCERT (現場音樂會) 再現了 300 個座位的現場音樂會音響效果。 x GAME (遊戲) 從電動遊戲軟體中獲得最大程度的聲音衝 擊。 x SPORTS (運動) 再現了適用於播放老電影的單聲道聲音。 使用耳機時 聲場 顯示 HEADPHONE 2CH HP 2CH HEADPHONE THEATER HP THEATER x HEADPHONE 2CH 此模式從耳機左 / 右輸出聲音。標準 2 聲道 (立體聲)音源完全繞過聲場處理。多聲道 環繞格式被混合成兩個聲道。 x HEADPHONE THEATER 此模式從耳機左 / 右輸出聲音作為環繞聲。 續 61CT 若要關閉聲音效果 反覆按 AUTO FORMAT DIRECT 鍵,直至前面板 顯示幕中出現 “A.F.D AUTO”。 選擇後環繞解碼模式 當將耳機連接到 PHONES 插孔 反覆按 AUTO FORMAT DIRECT 鍵或 MODE 鍵, 直至前面板顯示幕中出現 “HP 2CH”。 注意 • 當播放 Super Audio CD 時,以及當輸入流為 dts 2048 幀時,此功能無效。 • 當您播放 Super Audio CD (直流數位)時,聲場 自動改變為 “AUTO FORMAT DIRECT AUTO”。 • 本系統與 DTS 96/24 解碼功能不相容。當您播放 DTS 96/24 光碟時,系統將其作為普通光碟播放。 提示 此功能可使您選擇多聲道輸入流的後環繞訊 號的解碼模式。 通過對以Dolby Digital EX、DTS-ES Matrix、 DTS-ES Discrete 6.1 格式等錄製的 DVD 軟 體等的後環繞訊號解碼,您能欣賞到電影獨 有的後環繞聲音 (第 96 頁)。 注意 此功能只有在系統連接了後環繞揚聲器 (第 20 頁)並且在 [ 尺寸 ] 設定中將 [ 後環繞 ] 設定為 [ 是 ]( 第 86 頁 ) 時才有效。 • 如果您要從6個或7個揚聲器中輸出電視機聲音或 2 聲道音源的立體聲聲音,則選擇除 “AUTO FORMAT DIRECT AUTO”或 “2CH STEREO”以外的 任何聲場。 • 系統將記憶每個功能模式最後選擇的聲場。 任何時候您選擇 DVD 或 TUNER 功能,最後套用於 該功能的聲場將再次自動套用。例如,如果您採 用 HALL 作為聲場聽 DVD,然後您更換到另一個功 能,隨後又返回到 DVD,則 HALL 將重新套用。對 於調諧器,所有預設電台的聲場都將被單獨記憶。 • 您可通過外包裝確定程序軟體的編碼格式。 – Dolby Digital 光碟標有 標誌。 – 用 DTS-ES 編碼的程序標有 DTS-ES。 – 用 Dolby Surround 編碼的程序標有 標誌。 – DTS Digital Surround 光碟標有 DTS。 ENTER X/x AMP MENU 蓋子打開狀態。 1 2 按 AMP MENU 鍵。 反覆按 X/x,直至前面板顯示幕中出現 “CUSTOMIZE”,然後按 ENTER 鍵。 3 反覆按 X/x,直至前面板顯示幕中出現“SB DEC”,然後按 ENTER 鍵。 4 根據輸入流按 X/x 選擇您需要的後環繞模 式,然後按 ENTER 鍵或 AMP MENU 鍵。 預設設定為 “SB MATRIX”。 當選擇 “SB MATRIX”時 儘管輸入流含有 6.1 聲道解碼標記 a),仍套 用 Dolby Digital EX 或 DTS-ES 對後環繞訊 號進行解碼。解碼器符合 Dolby Digital EX 或 DTS-ES。 62CT 輸入流 輸出聲道 套用的後環繞解碼器 Dolby Digital 5.1 6.1 矩陣解碼器符合 Dolby Digital EX DTS 5.1 6.1 DTS 矩陣解碼器 矩陣解碼器符合 Dolby Digital EX 6.1 DTS-ES Matrix 6.1c) DTS 矩陣解碼器 6.1 DTS 獨立解碼器 DTS-ES Discrete 6.1d) 當選擇 “SB AUTO”時 當輸入流含有 6.1 聲道解碼標記 a)時,將套 用適當的解碼器對後環繞訊號進行解碼。 輸入流 輸出聲道 套用的後環繞解碼器 Dolby Digital 5.1 5.1 — DTS 5.1 5.1 — Dolby 6.1 Digital EXb) 矩陣解碼器符合 Dolby Digital EX DTS-ES 6.1 Matrix 6.1c) DTS 矩陣解碼器 6.1 DTS 獨立解碼器 DTS-ES Discrete 6.1d) 不進行後環繞解碼。 a) 6.1 聲道解碼標記是錄製在類似 DVD 軟體中的資 訊。 b) Dolby Digital DVD 含有環繞 EX 標記。有關環 繞 EX 電影的資訊,請查閱 Dolby Corporation 的網頁說明。 c) 編碼含有標記的軟體表示同時含有環繞 EX 和 5.1 聲道訊號。 d) 軟體編碼同時含有5.1聲道訊號和能將訊號返回 到 6.1 獨立聲道的 5.1 延伸流。獨立 6.1 聲道訊 號是 DVD 特有的訊號,不在電影院中使用。 聲音調節 Dolby 6.1 Digital EXb) 當選擇 “SB OFF”時 注意 • 選擇AUTO FORMAT DIRECT AUTO模式時才能選擇後 環繞解碼 (第 58 頁)。在其他聲場,此功能被 內部繞過。 • 有些光碟包裝上可能有 Dolby Digital Surround EX 標誌,但本身並沒有 Dolby Digital EX 標誌。 這時,選擇 “SB MATRIX”。 63CT 注意 使用聲音效果 本系統向您提供兩種類型的聲音效果,並只 需按一個鍵。選擇適合您需要的聲音。 DSGX NIGHT MODE 蓋子打開狀態。 按遙控器上的 NIGHT MODE 鍵或 DSGX 鍵。 啟動聲音效果。 x NIGHT MODE 在此模式中,即使音量很低,您也可以像在 電影院時一樣欣賞聲音效果或對話。此模式 對於在晚上看電影很有效。 x DSGX DSGX 開啟時,低頻將被有效增強。 若要關閉聲音效果 再次按 NIGHT MODE 鍵或 DSGX 鍵。 64CT • 只有在輸入流為 Dolby Digital 格式時,NIGHT MODE 功能才會開啟。 • 當您將耳機連接到本系統時,DSGX 功能將無效。 • 這兩種類型的聲音效果無法同時開啟。 • 視輸入流而定,DSGX 功能可能無效。 3 按 ENTER 鍵或 c 鍵。 角度編號變為 “-”。 使用各種附加功能 DVD 1 2 ( 2 7 ) TITLE12 18(34) 改變角度 T DVD 1:32:55 –(9) 4 使用數字按鈕或 X/x 選擇角度編號,然後 按 ENTER 鍵。 角度更改為選擇的角度。 若要關閉控制菜單 反覆按 DVD DISPLAY 鍵直至控制菜單關閉。 注意 C/X/x/c/ ENTER DVD DISPLAY 使用各種附加功能 如果 DVD 上對場面錄製了多個角度 (多角 度),則您可以改變觀看角度。 例如,當播放火車運動中場面時,您可以在 不中斷火車運動的情況下,顯示從火車前面、 火車左側或右側車窗所看到的景色。 視 DVD 而定,有些 DVD 即使是以多角度錄製,但也 可能無法改變角度。 提示 您可以直接按 ANGLE 鍵選擇角度。您每按一次此 鍵,角度將改變。 ANGLE 數字鍵 蓋子打開狀態。 1 播放時按 DVD DISPLAY 鍵。 出現控制菜單。 2 按 X/x 選擇 (角度)。 出現角度編號。 括號內數字是指角度總數。當光碟上錄 製了角度,[ 角度 ] 指示燈將點亮為綠色。 DVD 1 2 ( 2 7 ) TITLE12 18(34) T DVD 1:32:55 1(9) 65CT 3 顯示字幕 按 X/x 選擇語言。 視 DVD 而定,語言選擇將有所不同。 當顯示四位數字時,這表示語言代碼。 請查閱第 105 頁上的語言代碼一覽表, 以了解代碼所代表的語言。 如果光碟上錄製了字幕,您可以在播放光碟 時打開或關閉字幕。如果光碟上錄製了多種 語言字幕,您在播放時可以改變字幕語言, 或根據需要隨時打開或關閉字幕。例如,您 可以選擇您想練習的語言並打開字幕以便更 好的理解。 4 按 ENTER 鍵。 若要取消 [ 字幕語言 ] 設定 在步驟 3 選擇 [ 關 ]。 若要關閉控制菜單 反覆按 DVD DISPLAY 鍵直至控制菜單關閉。 注意 視 DVD 的不同情況而定,有些 DVD 即使錄製了多種 語言字幕,您也可能無法改變字幕。 提示 DVD DISPLAY C/X/x/c/ ENTER SUBTITLE 蓋子打開狀態。 1 播放時按 DVD DISPLAY 鍵。 出現控制菜單。 2 按 X/x 鍵選擇 (字幕語言),然 後按 ENTER 鍵或 c 鍵。 出現 [ 字幕語言 ] 選項。 66CT 您可以直接按 SUBTITLE 鍵選擇字幕。您每按一次 此鍵,語言將改變。 3 鎖定光碟 按 X/x 鍵選擇 (用戶鎖定),然 後按 ENTER 鍵或 c 鍵。 (用戶鎖定、視聽者年齡控制) 4 按 X/x 鍵選擇 [ 開 t],然後按 ENTER 鍵。 x 如果您還沒有輸入密碼 出現登錄一個新密碼的顯示。 用戶鎖定 使用各種附加功能 您可以設定兩種光碟播放限制。 • 用戶鎖定 您可以設定播放限制,使系統不播放不合適 的光碟。 • 視聽者年齡控制 有些 DVD 的播放可以根據預先確定的等級, 如觀看者年齡來加以限制。 視聽者年齡控制和用戶鎖定使用相同的密 碼。 [ 用戶鎖定 ] 被選擇。 ᮢ⽁હ 您可以對多達 25 張光碟設定相同的用戶鎖定 密碼。如果設定第 26 張光碟時,您第一個設 定密碼的光碟播放限制將被取消。 ⱚҘɺΤᅘ᱿4̤ᄲᷪ,ᤋരྈ ENTER ⼫ȯ 使用數字鍵輸入 4 位數密碼,然後按 ENTER 鍵。 出現確認密碼顯示。 x x 如果您已經登錄了一個密碼 出現輸入密碼顯示。 C/X/x/c/ ENTER O RETURN DVD DISPLAY ᮢ⽁હ ⱚҘᷪ,ᤋരྈ ENTER ⼫ȯ 數字鍵 蓋子打開狀態。 1 2 放入您要鎖定的光碟。 5 使用數字鍵輸入 4 位數密碼,然後按 ENTER 鍵。 如果光碟正在播放,按 x 鍵停止播放。 出現 [ 用戶鎖定功能已設定。] 資訊,然 後螢幕回到控制菜單顯示。 在停止模式中,按 DVD DISPLAY 鍵。 如果您輸入密碼時發生錯誤 出現控制菜單。 在按 ENTER 鍵前按 C,並輸入正確號碼。 如果您操作有誤 按 O RETURN 鍵,然後從步驟 3 重新開始。 續 67CT 若要關閉控制菜單 反覆按 DVD DISPLAY 鍵直至控制菜單關閉。 若要關閉用戶鎖定功能 1 2 播放已設定用戶鎖定的光碟 1 放入已設定用戶鎖定的光碟。 出現 [ 用戶鎖定 ] 顯示。 在步驟 4 中,選擇 [ 關 t],然後按 ENTER 鍵。 使用數字鍵輸入4位數密碼,然後按ENTER鍵。 ᮢ⽁હ 若要更改密碼 ᮢ⽁હԼ⋱⥑હȯ 1 在步驟 4 中,按 X/x 選擇 [ 密碼 t],然後按 ENTER 鍵。 出現輸入密碼顯示。 2 3 使用數字鍵輸入4位數密碼,然後按ENTER鍵。 4 若要確認您的密碼,使用數字鍵重新輸入密 碼,然後按 ENTER 鍵。 使用數字鍵輸入新的 4 位數密碼,然後按 ENTER 鍵。 ⣬ႩᄍŊ⦼ⱚҘ෨᱿ᷪ౼ྈ ENTER ⼫ȯ 2 使用數字鍵輸入 4 位數密碼,然後按 ENTER 鍵。 系統準備播放。 注意 • 當您更改已經設定了用戶鎖定的 Super Audio CD 的層或區域,則會出現輸入密碼顯示。 • 如果您對Hybrid Super Audio CD設定用戶鎖定密 碼,則用戶鎖定設定僅對當前層有效。 提示 如果您忘記了密碼,在 [ 用戶鎖定 ] 顯示要求您輸 入密碼時用數字鍵輸入六位數 “199703”,然後按 ENTER 鍵。顯示幕中將要求您輸入新的 4 位數密碼。 68CT 對兒童的限制播放 (視聽者年齡控 制)(僅適用 DVD) 3 按 X/x 鍵選擇 [ 視聽者年齡控制 t],然後 按 ENTER 鍵或 c 鍵。 x 如果您還沒有輸入密碼 出現登錄一個新密碼的顯示。 有些 DVD 的播放可以根據預先確定的等級, 如觀看者年齡來加以限制。“視聽者年齡控 制”功能允許您設定播放限制等級。 所限制的場面不會被播放,或會被其他場面 替代。 使用各種附加功能 使用數字鍵輸入 4 位數密碼,然後按 ENTER 鍵。 出現確認密碼顯示。 x 當您已經登錄了一個密碼 C/X/x/c/ ENTER DVD SETUP 出現輸入密碼顯示。 O RETURN 數字鍵 蓋子打開狀態。 1 在停止模式中,按 DVD SETUP 鍵。 出現設定顯示畫面。 2 按X/x鍵選擇[個人設定],然後按ENTER鍵 或 c 鍵。 4 使用數字鍵輸入 4 位數密碼,然後按 ENTER 鍵。 出現設定播放限制等級和更改密碼顯 示。 顯示 [ 個人設定 ]。 續 69CT 5 按 X/x 鍵選擇 [ 標準 ],然後按 ENTER 鍵或 c 鍵。 顯示 [ 標準 ] 選項。 如果您操作有誤 按 ORETURN 鍵或 C 鍵返回到先前的畫面。 若要關閉設定顯示 反覆按 DVD SETUP 鍵直至設定顯示畫面關閉。 若要在輸入密碼後關閉視聽者年齡控制功 能並播放 DVD 在步驟 8 中將 [ 水平 ] 設定為 [ 關 ]。 若要更改密碼 6 按 X/ x鍵選擇一個地理區域作為播放限制 等級,然後按 ENTER 鍵。 地區已選擇。 如果您選擇了 [ 其他 t],則使用數字 鍵選擇並輸入第 71 頁表格內的標準代 碼。 7 按 X/x 鍵選擇 [ 水平 ],然後按 ENTER 鍵或 c 鍵。 顯示 [ 水平 ] 選項。 8 按 X/x 鍵選擇所要的等級,然後按 ENTER 鍵。 視聽者年齡控制設定完成。 值越低,限制越嚴格。 70CT 1 在步驟 5 中,使用 x 鍵選擇 [ 改變密碼 t], 然後按 ENTER 鍵或 c 鍵。 出現輸入密碼顯示。 2 按照步驟 3 輸入新的密碼。 播放已設定視聽者年齡控制的光碟 地區代碼 代碼號 阿根廷 2044 出現 [ 視聽者年齡控制 ] 顯示。 奧地利 2046 使用數字鍵輸入 4 位數密碼,然後按 ENTER 鍵。 澳洲 2047 巴基斯坦 2427 系統開始播放。 巴西 2070 注意 比利時 2057 • 如果您播放沒有視聽者年齡控制功能的DVD時,則 無法在本系統上限制播放。 • 視DVD而定,您可能會在播放光碟時被要求更改視 聽者年齡控制等級。在此情況下,請輸入您的密 碼,然後改變等級。如果取消了恢復播放模式, 則限制等級恢復到初始等級。 丹麥 2115 德國 2109 俄羅斯 2489 法國 2174 菲律賓 2424 芬蘭 2165 韓國 2304 荷蘭 2376 加拿大 2079 馬來西亞 2363 墨西哥 2362 紐西蘭 2390 挪威 2379 葡萄牙 2436 日本 2276 瑞典 2499 瑞士 2086 泰國 2528 台灣 2543 香港 2219 西班牙 2149 新加坡 2501 義大利 2254 印度 2248 印尼 2238 英國 2184 智利 2090 中國 2092 2 提示 如果您忘記了密碼,取出光碟並重複 “對兒童的 限制播放”中的步驟 1 至 3。當您被要求輸入密碼 時,用數字鍵輸入 “199703”,然後按 ENTER 鍵。 顯示幕中將要求您輸入新的 4 位數密碼。在步驟 3 中輸入新的 4 位數密碼後,將光碟重新放入系統並 按 H 鍵。當出現 [ 視聽者年齡控制 ] 顯示時,請 輸入您的新密碼。 使用各種附加功能 標準 放入光碟並按 H 鍵。 1 71CT 可控制的電視機代碼號 如果列出的代碼號不止一個,嘗試將其依次 輸入直到找到對您的電視機有效的代碼號。 其他操作 用 提供 的遙 控 器控 制電 視機 代碼號 SONY 001 通過調節遙控訊號,您可以用提供的遙控器 控制您的電視機。 Admiral 012,016,039 AIWA 001,007,008 注意 AKAI 002,010,027 • 如果您輸入新代碼號,先前輸入的代碼號將被消 除。 • 當您更換遙控器電池時,代碼號會自行復原為預 設設置 (SONY)。重新設定適當的代碼號。 AOC 002 用遙控器控制電視機 TV ?/1 TV/VIDEO TV 鍵 數字鍵 Bell&Howell 016,039 Bestar 027 Blaupunkt 052,053 Blue sky 027 Brandt 045 Broksonic (Brocsonic) 002 Bush 006,027 Clatronic 027 Croslex 034 CURTIS-MATHES 002,046 DAEWOO 002,003,004,005,006,027 Daytron 020 Deccacolour 037 DUAL 027 EMERSON 002,020 TV CH +/- Ferguson 035,042,045 TV VOL +/- First line 010,027 FISHER 009,010 FUJITSU 055 FUNAI 054 蓋子打開狀態。 按住 TV [/1 鍵的同時,使用數字鍵輸入您的 電視機製造商代碼(參見表格)。然後放開 TV [/1 鍵。 如果成功設定了製造商代碼,電視機鍵將緩 慢閃爍兩次。如果設定不成功,則電視機鍵 將快速閃爍五次。 72CT 電視機 製造商 Fraba 027 General Electric 002,012,049 Goodmans 006,027,045 GRUNDIG 038,052,053 HITACHI 002,013,014,015,020, 021,027 Inno-Hit 027 Irradio 027 ITT/NOKIA 025,026 JC Penny 002,012 JVC 018,019 Kendo 027 Kiton 027 代碼號 製造商 代碼號 KTV 002,020 TaTung 027 LG/Goldstar 002,020,027,028,038 TEAC 027 LOEWE 027,028,038 Techimagen 027 LXI(Sears) 002,009,012,034,046 TELEFUNKEN 035,041,042,043,044,045 MAGNAVOX 002,020,027,034 THOMSON 035,041,043,045 MARANTZ 022 Thorn 027 Mark 027 TOSHIBA 039,046,047,048 Matsui 010,052,053 Universum 027 Medion 027 Vestel 027 Mitsubishi/MGA 002,021,022 Videch 002,015 NEC 002,020,023,024,048 W.W.House 027 NEI 027 WARDS 002,020 NOKIA 025,026 Watson 027 Nokia Oceanic 026 ZENITH 016,017 Nordmende 035,042 Okano 027 ORION 007 PANASONIC 049,050,051 Philco 002,004,015,020,034 PHILIPS 013,027,034 Phoenix 027 PIONEER 029,030,031,046,049 Portland 002 Provision 027 PYE 027 QUASAR 039,049 Radio 027 RADIO SHACK 002,012,022 Radiola 034 RCA/PROSCAN 002,012,032,033 SABA 035,041,042,043,045 SAMSUNG 002,013,020,027,028, 036,037,038 SANYO 009,010,011 Schneider 027 SCOTT 002 SHARP 020,039,040 SIEMENS 052 Signature 016,039,040 Sinudyne 027 Supertech 027 Supervision 027 SYLVANIA 002,034 其他操作 製造商 續 73CT 控制電視機 您可以用下列鍵控制電視機。 按 您可以 TV [/1 打開或關閉電視機。 TV/VIDEO 在電視和其他輸入源之間切換 電視機的輸入源。 TV VOL +/- 調節電視機音量。 TV CH +/- 選擇電視頻道。 使用SONY TV DIRECT功能 SONY TV DIRECT 使您僅按一鍵就能打開 SONY 電視機和本系統,並將系統模式改為“DVD”, 然後再切換您設定的電視機輸入源。 SONY TV DIRECT 使用數字鍵控制電視機 如果您將遙控器設定為電視機模式,則您可 以使用數字鍵控制電視機。 按 TV 鍵。 TV 鍵變為紅色,遙控器被設定為電視機模式。 您可以按數字鍵選擇電視頻道。 >10 用於選擇大於 10 的頻道號碼。 若要取消電視機模式,則再按一次 TV 鍵。 TV/VIDEO TV 鍵 TV CH + 數字鍵 注意 • 視電視機而定,您可能無法控制您的電視機或使 用以上一些鍵。 • 如果您 10 秒鐘未操作遙控器,則 TV 鍵關閉。 蓋子打開狀態。 提示 視電視機製造而定,以下方法也可以使用。按 >10, 然後按數字。(例如,對於 25 頻道,按 >10,然後 按 2 和 5。) 準備工作 登錄與本系統連接的電視機輸入源。 使用數字鍵輸入與本系統連接的電視機輸入源 代碼 (參見下表)時,按住 TV/VIDEO 鍵。 電視機輸入源被選擇。 如果成功設定了電視機輸入源代碼,電視機 鍵將緩慢閃爍兩次。如果設定不成功,則電 視機鍵將快速閃爍五次。 按 編號 電視機輸入源 TV/VIDEO 0 無輸入源 (預設) 1 VIDEO1 2 VIDEO2 3 VIDEO3 4 VIDEO4 5 VIDEO5 6 VIDEO6 7* COMPONENT1 INPUT 8* COMPONENT2 INPUT * 北美機型除外。 74CT 操作 將遙控器對著電視機和本系統的方向,然後按一下 SONY TV DIRECT 鍵。 從遙控器傳送代碼時,電視機鍵閃爍。 如果功能無效,請更改傳送時間。傳送時間 視電視機而異。 使用錄影機或其他裝置 您可以使用連接到 VIDEO 或 SAT 插孔的錄影 機或其他裝置。有關操作的進一步資訊,請 參閱隨裝置提供的操作手冊。 若要更改傳送時間 使用數字鍵輸入傳送時間代碼 (參見下表)時 按住 TV CH + 鍵。 FUNCTION 按 編號 傳送時間 TV CH + 1 0.5 (預設) 2 1 3 1.5 4 2 5 2.5 6 3 7 3.5 8 4 其他操作 從遙控器傳送的時間被選擇。 如果成功設定了傳送時間代碼,電視機鍵將 緩慢閃爍兩次。如果設定不成功,則電視機 鍵將快速閃爍五次。 反覆按 FUNCTION 鍵,直至您連接裝置的 VIDEO 或 SAT 出現在前面板顯示幕中。 每按一次 FUNCTION 鍵,系統的模式按以下順 序改變。 FM t AM t VIDEO t SAT t DVD t FM... 注意 • 此功能僅適用於 SONY 電視機系列。 • 如果電視機和本系統之間的距離太遠,此功能可 能無效。請將系統裝於電視機附近。 • 電視機鍵閃爍時,請將遙控器一直指向電視機和 本系統。 75CT 欣賞多路廣播聲音 ( 雙單聲道) 欣賞無線電廣播 預設無線電電台 當系統接收到 AC-3 多路廣播訊號時,您能夠 欣賞多路廣播聲音。 您可以預設 20 個調頻電台和 10 個調幅電台。 在進行調諧之前,請確保將音量調到最小。 注意 若要接收 AC-3 訊號,您需要使用 OPTICAL 導線 ( 第 26 頁 ) 將數位衛星調諧器連接到本系統,並 將數位衛星調諧器的數位輸出模式設定為 AAC。 TUNER/BAND TUNING -/+ C/X/x/c/ ENTER C/X/x/c/ ENTER TUNER MENU 蓋子打開狀態。 AMP MENU 1 蓋子打開狀態。 1 2 每按一次 TUNER/BAND 鍵,波段在 AM 和 FM 之間輪換。 按 AMP MENU 鍵。 反覆按 x/X,直至前面板顯示幕中出現 “CUSTOMIZE”,然後按 ENTER 鍵或 c 鍵。 系統進入自訂菜單模式。 3 反覆按 x/X,直至前面板顯示幕中出現 “DUAL MONO”,然後按 ENTER 鍵或 c 鍵。 4 按 x/X 鍵選擇您想要的聲音。 反覆按 TUNER/BAND 鍵,直至您想要的波段 出現在前面板顯示幕中。 2 按住 TUNING + 或 -,直至開始掃描,然後鬆 開。 當系統調諧到某個電台時掃描停止。 “TUNED”和 “ST”(對於立體聲節目) 出現在前面板顯示幕中。 ST MHz x MAIN 主音從左右揚聲器中輸出。 x SUB 副音從左右揚聲器中輸出。 x MAIN+SUB 主音和副音從左右揚聲器中輸出。 x MAIN/SUB 主音從左揚聲器中輸出,副音從右揚聲 器中輸出。 5 按 AMP MENU 鍵。 關閉 AMP 菜單。 76CT 3 4 5 按 TUNER MENU 鍵。 反覆按 C/c/x/X 鍵,直至“MEMORY?”出 現在前面板顯示幕中。 按 ENTER 鍵。 一個預設號碼出現在前面板顯示幕上。 ST 6 按 C/c/x/X 鍵選擇您想要的預設號碼。 收聽無線電廣播 ST 首先在系統記憶體中預設無線電電台 (請參 見第 76 頁上的 “預設無線電電台”)。 7 按 ENTER 鍵。 此電台被儲存。 "/1 TUNER/BAND FUNCTION DISPLAY m TUNING -/+ x PRESET -/+ ST MHz 其他操作 8 VOL +/- 重複 1 至 7 儲存其他電台。 如要更改預設號碼 從步驟 1 重新開始。 若要更改調幅調諧間隔 調幅調諧間隔可以設定為 10 kHz(預設)或 9 kHz (適合有些地區)中的任何一個。 若要更改調幅調諧間隔,先調諧到任何一個 調幅電台,然後按遙控器上的 "/1 鍵或系統 上的 "/1 鍵關閉系統。在按住系統上 VOLUME+ 鍵的同時,按系統上的 "/1 鍵打開電源。如 果更改間隔,調幅預設電台將被消除。 若要復原間隔,則重複相同的步驟。 FM MODE 蓋子打開狀態。 1 反覆按 FUNCTION 鍵,直至 “FM”或 “AM” 出現在前面板顯示幕中。 最後接收的電台將被調入。 ST MHz 2 反覆按 PRESET + 或 - 選擇您想要的預設電 台。 每按一次此鍵,系統即調入一個預設電 台。 每按一次 TUNER/BAND 鍵,波段在 AM 和 FM 之間輪換。 3 按 VOL +/- 節音量。 若要關閉無線電 按 "/1 鍵。 續 77CT 若要收聽非預設無線電電台 在步驟 2 中使用手動或自動調諧。 若要進行 手動調諧,則 反覆按遙控 器上的 TUNING + 或 - 鍵。 若要進行自動調諧,則按住遙控器上的 TUNING + 或 - 鍵。當您停止自動調諧時按 x 鍵。 命名預設電台 一個預設電台的名稱最多可輸入 8 個字元。 當選擇某個電台時,該電台的名稱 (例如 “XYZ”)將出現在系統的前面板顯示幕中。 請注意,每個預設電台只能輸入一個名稱。 TUNER/ BAND 提示 • 如果調頻節目有噪音,則按遙控器上的 FM MODE 鍵,使 “MONO”出現在前面板顯示幕中。這樣將 失去立體聲效果,但接收狀況將得到改善。再次 按此鍵則恢復立體聲效果。 • 若要改善接收狀況,請重新確定附帶天線方向。 若要查看頻率或聲場 FUNCTION PRESET -/+ C/X/x/c/ ENTER 反覆按 DISPLAY 鍵。 您每按一下 DISPLAY 鍵,前面板顯示幕改變 如下: 電台的索引名稱 *t 頻率 t 聲場 t 電台的 索引名稱 ... * 如果您已輸入了預設電台名稱,則顯示此項 ( 第 78 頁 )。 蓋子打開狀態。 1 TUNER MENU 反覆按 FUNCTION 鍵,直至 “FM”或 “AM” 出現在前面板顯示幕中。 每按一次 TUNER/BAND 鍵,波段在 AM 和 FM 之間輪換。 您最後接收的電台將被調入。 每按一次 FUNCTION 鍵,系統的模式按以 下順序改變: FM t AM t VIDEO t SAT t DVD t FM... 78CT 2 反覆按 PRESET+ 或 - 鍵選擇您想要建立索引 名稱的預設電台。 3 4 按 TUNER MENU 鍵。 5 按 ENTER 鍵。 反覆按 C/c 鍵,直至“NAME IN?”出現在 前面板顯示幕中。 6 使用游標鍵建立索引名稱: 按 X/x 鍵選擇一個字元,然後按 c 鍵將 游標移動到下一個位置。 如果您操作有誤 反覆按 C/c 鍵,直至要更改的字元閃爍, 然後按 X/x 鍵選擇想要的字元。一個無 線電電台名稱可以輸入大寫字母、數字 和其他符號。 7 按 ENTER 鍵。 此電台被儲存。 使用睡眠定時器 您可以將系統設定為在預設的時間關閉,這 樣您便能聽著音樂入睡。預設時間可以以 10 分鐘遞減。 SLEEP 其他操作 按 SLEEP 鍵。 每按一次此鍵,分鐘顯示 (剩餘時間)如下 改變: AUTO t 90MIN t 80MIN t 70MIN r R SLEEP OFF T 10MIN ..... 50MIN T 60MIN 當選擇 AUTO 在當前光碟結束播放時系統關閉 (最長 240 分鐘)。如果手動停止光碟播放,則系統關 閉。 “AUTO”模式只有在設定 “AUTO”之前選擇 了例如 DVD 等功能時才有效。 若要查看剩餘時間 按一次 SLEEP 鍵。如果選擇了 “AUTO”,則 無法查看剩餘時間。 若要更改剩餘時間 反覆按 SLEEP 鍵選擇所需的時間。 若要取消睡眠定時器功能 反覆按 SLEEP 鍵,直至前面板顯示幕中出現 “SLEEP OFF”。 79CT 更 改 前面 板 顯示 幕 的亮 度 您可以分兩級改變前面板顯示幕的亮度。 Z . ,或 Z。 前面板顯示幕上出現 “COLD RESET”,恢復 到預設設定。 AMP MENU 蓋子打開狀態。 按 AMP MENU 鍵。 反覆按 x/X 鍵,直至前面板顯示幕中出現 “CUSTOMIZE”,然後按 ENTER 鍵或 c 鍵。 系統進入自訂菜單模式。 3 反覆按 x/X 鍵,直至前面板顯示幕中出現 “DIMMER”,然後按 ENTER 鍵或 c 鍵。 4 5 按 x/X 鍵選擇前面板顯示幕的亮度。 按 AMP MENU 鍵。 關閉 AMP 菜單。 80CT 您可以將揚聲器設定和預設電台等系統參數 恢復到預設設定。 同時按系統上的 ., C/X/x/c/ ENTER 1 2 返回預設設定 2 設定和調整 使用設定顯示 按 X/x 鍵從顯示列表:[ 語言設定 ]、[ 畫面 設定 ]、[ 個人設定 ]、[ 揚聲器設定 ] 和 [ 設定 ] 中選擇設定項目。然後按 ENTER 鍵 或 c 鍵。 出現選擇的設定項目。 例如:[ 畫面設定 ] 利用設定顯示,可對影像和聲音等項目進行 多種調整。除了其他設定以外,您也可以設 定字幕語言及設定顯示語言。關於設定顯示 項目的詳細說明,參見第 82-88 頁。關於設 定顯示項目的一覽表,請參見第 106 頁。 3 如何使用設定顯示 使用 X/x 鍵選擇項目,然後按 ENTER 鍵或 c 鍵。 設定和調整 出現所選擇項目中的選項。 例如:[ 電視機形式 ] C/X/x/c/ ENTER O RETURN DVD SETUP 選項 按 C 或 O RETURN 返回設定項目。 4 蓋子打開狀態。 1 使用 X/x 鍵選擇設定,然後按 ENTER 鍵。 選擇設定值後,設定即完成。 例如:[4:3 全景掃描 ] 選擇的設定 在停止模式中,按 DVD SETUP 鍵。 出現設定顯示畫面。 主項目 若要關閉設定顯示 反覆按 DVD SETUP 鍵直至設定顯示畫面關閉。 81CT 設 定 顯示 或 聲音 軌 跡語 言 顯示設定 (畫面設定) (語言設定) 根據連接的電視機選擇設定。 利用 [ 語言設定 ] 可以為畫面顯示或聲音軌 跡設定各種語言。 在設定顯示中選擇 [ 語言設定 ]。關於利用 顯示的詳細說明,請參見 “使用設定顯示” ( 第 81 頁 )。 在設定顯示中選擇 [ 畫面設定 ]。關於利用 顯示的詳細說明,請參見 “使用設定顯示” ( 第 81 頁 )。 預設設定有下划線。 x 電視機形式 (僅適用 DVD) x 畫面顯示語言 ( 螢幕顯示 ) 選擇所連接電視機的縱橫比 (4:3 標準或寬 螢幕)。 選擇畫面顯示語言。 從顯示列表中選擇語言。 16:9 如果您連接寬螢幕電視機或帶 寬螢幕模式功能電視機則選擇 此項。 4:3 信箱 形式 如果連接 4:3螢幕電視機則選擇 此項。顯示寬螢幕影像時,螢幕 頂部和底部有黑帶。 4:3 全景掃描 如果連接 4:3螢幕電視機則選擇 此項。在整個螢幕上自動顯示寬 畫面,並切除超出螢幕部分。 x DVD 菜單 (僅適用 DVD) 選擇想要的 DVD 菜單語言。 從顯示列表中選擇語言。 x 聲音語言 (僅適用 DVD) 選擇聲音軌跡語言。 從顯示列表中選擇語言。 x 字幕語言 (僅適用 DVD) 選擇字幕語言。 從顯示列表中選擇語言。 注意 如果您選擇了一種未錄製在 DVD 上的語言,本機將 自動選擇一種已錄製的語言([ 畫面顯示語言 ] 除 外)。 提示 如果您在 [DVD 菜單 ]、[ 聲音語言 ] 或 [ 字幕語言 ] 中選擇 [ 其他 t],請從列表中選擇 一個語言代碼並使用數字鍵輸入 ( 第 105 頁 )。 在做出選擇後,在下次選擇 [ 其他 t] 時將顯示此 語言代碼 (4 位數)。 82CT 視該國家的機型而定,預設設定會有不同。 x 分量視頻輸出 16:9 該設定將改變系統上 COMPONENT VIDEO OUT 插孔的訊號輸出類型。關於不同類型的詳細 資訊參見第 97 頁。 4:3 信箱形式 4:3 全景掃描 隔行 當您連接到標準(隔行格式)電 視機時選擇此項。 逐行 當您的電視機能接收逐行訊號 時選擇此項。 若要設定 [ 逐行 ] 1 使用 X/x 鍵選擇 [ 畫面設定 ] 中的 [ 分量視頻 輸出 ],然後按 ENTER 鍵。 2 使用 X/x 鍵選擇 [ 逐行 ],然後按 ENTER 鍵。 注意 設定和調整 視 DVD 而定,可能自動選擇 [4:3 信箱形式 ] 代替 [4:3 全景掃描 ],反之亦然。 x 屏幕節能 打開和關閉螢幕節能,使系統處於暫停或停 止模式 15 分鐘,或播放 CD、Super Audio CD、MP3 或 JPEG 檔案 (幻燈片放映時除外) 超過 15 分鐘,就會出現螢幕節能影像。螢幕 節能能幫助防止顯示設備受損 (殘影)。按 H 鍵關閉螢幕節能。 開 打開螢幕節能。 關 關閉螢幕節能。 出現確認顯示。 x 背景畫面 在停止模式或播放 CD 時選擇電視機螢幕背景 顏色或影像。 封套畫面圖像 封套畫面圖像 (靜止影像)出 現在背景中,但僅限於光碟上已 經錄 製 了 封套 畫 面圖 像 (CDEXTRA 等)。如果光碟中未含封 套畫面,則出現 [ 圖形 1] 畫面。 圖形 1-5 存儲在系統內的預設影像出現 在背景中。 藍色 背景色彩為藍色。 黑色 背景色彩為黑色。 3 使用 X/x 鍵選擇 [ 是 ],然後按 ENTER 鍵。 輸出訊號類型更改為逐行格式。 續 83CT 注意 • 如果您的電視機接收逐行訊號,用分量視頻線 (不提供)將系統的 COMPONENT VIDEO OUT 與電 視機連接,並設定為逐行格式。 • 當在[畫面設定]中選擇了[逐行],則MONITOR OUT 插孔中沒有訊號輸出。 • 如果您將[畫面設定]中的[分量視頻輸出]設定為 [ 逐行 ],而您的電視機無法接收逐行格式訊號, 則可能出現畫面干擾。這時,請將設定復原至隔 行格式 ( 第 27 頁 )。 • 選擇 [ 隔行 ] 時,確認顯示不出現。 個人設定 (個人設定) 允許設定視聽者年齡控制和其他設定。 在設定顯示中選擇 [ 個人設定 ]。關於利用 顯示的詳細說明,請參見 “使用設定顯示” ( 第 81 頁 )。 預設設定有下划線。 x 彩色系統 (僅適用於亞洲、澳洲和沙烏地阿 拉伯機型) 播放 VIDEO CD 時選擇彩色系統。 自動 以光碟的系統 PAL 或 NTSC 輸出 視頻訊號。如果您的電視機是 DUAL 系統,請選擇 “自動”。 PAL 改變 NTSC 光碟的視頻訊號,並 以 PAL 系統輸出此訊號。 NTSC 改變 PAL 光碟的視頻訊號,並以 NTSC 系統輸出此訊號。 注意 • 您無法改變光碟自身的彩色系統。 • 在亞洲機型中,您可以根據所連接的電視機改變 本裝置的色彩系統 ( 第 27 頁 )。 x 視聽者年齡控制 t (僅適用 DVD) 對 DVD 設定密碼和播放限制等級,以限制兒 童播放。詳細說明,請參見 “對兒童的限制 播放 (視聽者年齡控制)(僅適用 DVD)” ( 第 69 頁 )。 84CT x 聲音軌跡選擇 (僅適用 DVD) x 資料光碟優先 (僅適用 MP3、JPEG) 當播放錄製了多音頻格式(PCM、MPEG 音頻、 DTS 或 Dolby Digital 格式)DVD 時,有最多 數量聲道的聲音軌跡有優先權。 當播放含有 MP3 音頻軌跡和 JPEG 影像檔案的 DATA CD (CD-ROM/CD-R/CD-RW)時,設定想 要播放的優先資料。 關 無優先權。 MP3 自動 有優先權。 如果光碟中存在 MP3 檔案,則系 統將此光碟識別為“MP3 光碟”。 如果光碟中只存在 JPEG 檔案, 則系統將此光碟識別為 “JPEG 光碟”。 JPEG 如果光碟中存在 JPEG 檔案,則 系統將此光碟識別為 “JPEG 光 碟”。如果光碟中只存在 MP3 檔 案,則 系 統 將 此 光 碟 識 別 為 “MP3 光碟”。 注意 x JPEG 日期 在控制菜單中更改 JPEG 影像的日期資訊順 序。 x 音頻動態範圍控制 * 縮小聲音軌跡的動態範圍。 在深夜以低音量觀看電影非常有效。 * 動態範圍壓縮 月/日/年 年/月/日 設定和調整 • 當此項目設定到 [ 自動 ],語言可能改變。在 [ 語言 設定 ] 中,[ 聲音軌跡選擇 ] 設定比 [ 聲音語言 ] 設定有更高的優先權 ( 第 82 頁 )。 • 如果 PCM、DTS、MPEG 音頻和 Dolby Digital 聲音軌 跡有相同數量的聲道,系統按照 PCM、DTS、Dolby Digital 和 MPEG 音頻聲音軌跡順序選擇。 • 視DVD而定,具有優先權的音頻聲道可能被預先確 定。在此情況中,您無法選擇 [ 自動 ] 將優先權 給 DTS、Dolby Digital 或 MPEG 音頻格式。 日/月/年 關 動態範圍無壓縮。 開 用此種由錄製技術人員預期的 動態範圍再現聲音軌跡。 年/日/月 注意 音頻動態範圍控制僅適用於 Dolby Digital 音源。 85CT 揚聲器設定 (揚聲器設定) 為獲得最佳環繞聲效果,設置您連接的揚聲 器尺寸和距收聽位置的距離。然後使用測試 音調將揚聲器音量電平和平衡調節到相同等 級。 在設定顯示中選擇 [ 揚聲器設定 ]。詳細說 明,請參見 “使用設定顯示”( 第 81 頁 )。 預設設定有下划線。 前置揚聲器 是 中置揚聲器 是:通常選擇此項。 無:如果未使用中置揚聲器則選 擇此項。 環繞聲 後:如果環繞揚聲器位於 B 區域 內則選擇此項。 側:如果環繞揚聲器位於 A 區域 內則選擇此項。 無:如果未使用環繞揚聲器則選 擇此項。 後環繞聲 無:通常選擇此項。 (在 [ 尺寸 ] 設 是:如果使用後環繞揚聲器則選 定中將 [ 環繞揚 擇此項。 聲器 ] 設定為 [ 無 ] 時不出 現。) 超低音揚聲器 是 注意 若要在更改設定時返回預設設定 選擇項目,然後按 CLEAR 鍵。 x 尺寸 如果您未連接中置或環繞揚聲器,或移動環 繞揚聲器,請設定 [ 中置揚聲器 ] 和 [ 環繞 聲 ] 的參數,並指定環繞揚聲器位置和高度。 由於前置揚聲器和超低音揚聲器設定是固定 的,因此您無法更改。 如果連接後環繞揚聲器,將 [ 後環繞聲 ] 設 定為 [ 是 ]。 • 當您選擇項目時,聲音會停止片刻。 • 視其他揚聲器的設定而定,超低音揚聲器可能輸 出過大的聲音。 x 視聽距離 下圖所示相對聆聽位置的揚聲器預設視聽距 離設定。 使用快速設定 ( 第 34 頁 ) 設定視聽距離時, 則自動顯示設定。 1.6m 位置圖示 1.6m 1.6m 1.6m 1.6m 90 A B 20 86CT A 45 B 1.6m 您移動揚聲器後,請務必在設定顯示中更改 數值。 前置揚聲器 1.6 m 從聆聽位置到前置揚聲器的距離可 以設定在 1.0 到 7.0m 範圍內,以 0.2m 遞增。 中置揚聲器 中置揚聲器距離可以朝著聆聽位置 1.6 m* 移 動,比 前 置 揚 聲 器 距 離 最 多 近 (在 [ 尺寸 ] 1.6m,以 0.2m 遞增。 設定中將 [ 中 置揚聲器 ] 設 定為 [ 是 ] 時 出現。) 後環繞聲 後環繞揚聲器距離可以朝著聆聽位 1.6 m 置移動,比前置揚聲器距離最多近 (在 [ 尺寸 ] 4.6m,以 0.2m 遞增。 設定中將 [ 後 環繞揚聲器 ] 設定為 [ 是 ] 時出 現。) 您可以按以下方法更改每個揚聲器音量電 平。務必將 [ 測試音調 ] 設置為 [ 開 ] 以方 便調節。 中置揚聲器 調節中置揚聲器音量電平(-6 dB 0 dB* 至 +6 dB,以 1 dB 遞增)。 (在 [ 尺寸 ] 設 定中將 [ 中置揚 聲器 ] 設定為 [ 是 ] 時出現。) 左環繞聲 0 dB* 調節環繞揚聲器音量電平(-6 dB 右環繞聲 0 dB* 至 +6 dB,以 1 dB 遞增)。 (在 [ 尺寸 ] 設 定中將 [ 環繞揚 聲器 ] 設定為 [ 無 ] 時不出 現。) 後環繞聲 調節後環繞揚聲器音量電平 0 dB (-10 dB 至 +10 dB,以 1 dB 遞 (在 [ 尺寸 ] 設 增)。 定中將 [ 後環繞 揚聲器 ] 設定為 [ 是 ] 時出現。) 超低音揚聲器 +4 dB* 設定和調整 環繞聲 環繞揚聲器距離可以朝著聆聽位置 1.6 m* 移 動,比 前 置 揚 聲 器 距 離 最 多 近 (在 [ 尺寸 ] 4.6m,以 0.2m 遞增。 設定中將 [ 環 繞揚聲器 ] 設 定為 [ 無 ] 時 不出現。) x 音量調整 調節超低音揚聲器音量電平 (-6 dB 至 +6 dB,以 1 dB 遞增) 。 * 當進行快速設定時 ( 第 34 頁 ),預設設定被改變。 * 當進行快速設定時 ( 第 34 頁 ),預設設定被改變。 注意 • 當您設定視聽距離時,聲音會停止片刻。 • 如果所有前置或環繞揚聲器未放置在與您聆聽位 置相等距離的位置,請根據最靠近的揚聲器設定 距離。 • 請勿將環繞揚聲器放置在距您聆聽位置的距離大 於前置揚聲器距離的位置。 • 視輸入流而定,[ 視聽距離 ] 設定可能無效。 續 87CT x 平衡調整 您可以按以下方法更改左右揚聲器平衡。務 必將 [ 測試音調 ] 設置為 [ 開 ] 以方便調節。 前置揚聲器 調節左右前置揚聲器之間的平衡。 (CENTER) 中心位置顯示為 “- - -”。 (您可以從中心向左或右分 6 級調 節。) 使用測試音調調節揚聲器平衡和電平 1 出現設定顯示畫面。 2 反覆按 X/x 鍵選擇 [ 揚聲器設定 ],然後按 ENTER 鍵或 c 鍵。 3 反覆按 X/x 鍵選擇 [ 測試音調 ],然後按 ENTER 鍵或 c 鍵。 4 反覆按 X/x 鍵選擇 [ 開 ],然後按 ENTER 鍵。 若要一次調節所有揚聲器音量 使用系統上的 VOLUME 控制器,或按 VOL +/鍵。 x 測試音調 揚聲器將發出測試音調以調節 “水平”和 “平衡”。 關 揚聲器不發出測試音調。 開 調節平衡過程中,左右揚聲器同時發出 測試音調。當您選擇一個 [ 揚聲器設 定 ] 項目,每個揚聲器按順序發出測試 音調。 在停止模式中按 DVD SETUP 鍵。 您可以依次從各揚聲器聽到測試音調。 5 從您的聆聽位置,使用 C/X/x/c 調節 [ 平衡調整 ] 和 [ 音量調整 ] 的值。 如果選擇 [ 平衡調整 ],左右揚聲器同時 發出測試音調。 如果選擇 [ 音量調整 ],只有您正在調節 的揚聲器發出測試音調。 6 7 當結束調節時按 ENTER 鍵。 8 反覆按 X/x 鍵選擇 [ 關 ],然後按 ENTER 鍵。 反覆按 X/x 鍵選擇 [ 測試音調 ],然後按 ENTER 鍵。 注意 • 在您調節揚聲器設置時,聲音會停止片刻。 • 後環繞揚聲器也可以在與之連接的放大器上進行 調節。 提示 若要不聽測試音調調節平衡或水平,則在步驟 3 中 選擇 [ 平衡調整 ] 或 [ 音量調整 ],然後按 ENTER 鍵。然後使用 X/x 調節平衡或電平,然後按 ENTER 鍵。 88CT 使用系統上的前面板顯示幕設定揚聲 器 CUSTOMIZE DUAL MONO 您可以使用前面板顯示幕中顯示的 AMP 菜單 設定揚聲器。 SB DEC* AMP 菜單列表 SP SETUP DIMMER CENTER SP CENTER Y CENTER N SURR SP SURR Y * 當您在 “SP SETUP”中將 “SURR SP”設 定為 “SURR Y”,“SURR B SP”設定為 “SURR B Y”時將出現此設定。 SURR N SURR B SPa) SURR B N F DIST 1.0 m - 7.0 m CEN DISTb) 1.0 m - 7.0 m MAIN SUB MAIN+SUB MAIN/SUB SB MATRIX SB AUTO SB OFF DIM OFF DIM ON SURR B Y 1.0 m - 7.0 m SB DISTb) 1.0 m - 7.0 m SP POSb) 設定和調整 SURR DISTb) SP BEHIND SP SIDE LEVEL C/X/x/c/ ENTER T.TONE OFF TESTTONE T.TONE ON 向左或向右分 6 級 F BALANCE CEN LEVEL b) -6 dB - +6 dB SL LEVEL b) -6 dB - +6 dB SR LEVEL b) -6 dB - +6 dB SB LEVELb) -10 dB - +10 dB SW LEVEL -6 dB - +6 dB AUDIO DRC DRC OFF DRC ON AMP MENU 蓋子打開狀態。 1 2 a) 按 AMP MENU 鍵。 反覆按X/x鍵,直至您想要設定的項目出現 在前面板顯示幕中。 xSP SETUP 當在 “SP SETUP”中將 “SURR SP”設定為 “SURR Y”時出現此設定。 b) 當在 “SP SETUP”中將相應的揚聲器設定為 “Y”時出現此設定。 設定揚聲器尺寸、距離和位置。 xLEVEL 設定每個揚聲器的平衡和電平,並打 開 / 關閉測試音調。 3 4 按 ENTER 鍵或 c 鍵。 按 X/x 鍵選擇想要的項目,然後按 ENTER 鍵 或 c 鍵。 若要設定項目,按 X/x 鍵,然後按 ENTER 鍵或 AMP MENU 鍵。 您可以設定以下項目。預設設定有下划 線。 續 89CT xSP SETUP xLEVEL CENTER SP CENTER Y:如果使用中置揚 (中置揚聲器) 聲器則選擇此項。 TEST TONE (測試音調) T TONE OFF:揚聲器不發出 測試音調。 T TONE ON:調 節平衡 過程 中,左右揚聲器同時發出測 試 音 調。當 您 選 擇 一 個 “LEVEL”項目,每個揚聲器 按順序發出測試音調。 F BALANCE (前置揚聲器 平衡) 0 調節左右前置揚聲器之間的 平衡。(您可以從中心向左 (L6)或右 (R6)分 6 級調 節。) CEN LEVELb) (中置揚聲器 電平) 0a) 調節中置揚聲器音量電平 (-6 dB 至 +6 dB,以 1 dB 遞 增)。 SL LEVELb) (左環繞揚聲 器電平) 0a) 調節左環繞揚聲器音量電平 (-6 dB 至 +6 dB,以 1 dB 遞 增)。 SR LEVELb) (右環繞揚聲 器電平) 0a) 調節右環繞揚聲器音量電平 (-6 dB 至 +6 dB,以 1 dB 遞 增)。 SB LEVELb) (後環繞揚聲 器電平) 0a) 調節後環繞揚聲器音量電平 (-10 dB 至 +10 dB,以 1dB 遞增)。 SW LEVEL (超低音揚聲 器電平) +4a) 調節超低音揚聲器音量電平 (-6 dB 至 +6 dB,以 1 dB 遞 增)。 AUDIO DRC (動態壓縮) DRC OFF:動態範圍無壓縮。 DRC ON:用此種由錄製技術 人員預期的動態範圍再現聲 音軌跡。 CENTER N:如果未使用中置 揚聲器則選擇此項。 SURR SP SURR Y:如果使用環繞揚聲 (環繞揚聲器) 器則選擇此項。 SURR N:如果未使用環繞揚 聲器則選擇此項。 a) SURR B SP (後環繞揚聲 器) F DIST (前置揚聲器 距離) 1.6mb) DISTc) SURR B N:如果未使用後環 繞揚聲器則選擇此項。 SURR B Y:如果使用後環繞 揚聲器則選擇此項。 從聆 聽位 置 到前 置揚 聲器 的距離可以設定在 1.0 到 7.0m 範圍內,以 0.2m 遞增。 CEN (中置揚聲器 距離) 1.6mb) 中置 揚聲 器 距離 可以 朝著 聆聽位置移動,比前置揚聲 器距離最多近 1.6m,以 0.2m 遞增。 SURR DISTc) (環繞揚聲器 距離) 1.6mb) 環繞 揚聲 器 距離 可以 朝著 聆聽位置移動,比前置揚聲 器距離最多近 4.6m,以 0.2m 遞增。 SB DISTc) (後環繞揚聲 器距離) 1.6mb) 後環 繞揚 聲 器距 離可 以朝 著聆聽位置移動,比前置揚 聲器距離最多近 4.6m,以 0.2m 遞增。 SP POSc) (環繞揚聲器 位置) SP BEHIND:如果環繞揚聲 器位 於聆 聽 位置 的後 區域 則選擇此項。 SP SIDE:如果環繞揚聲器 位於 聆聽 位 置的 側區 域則 選擇此項。 a)當在 “SP SETUP”中將 “SURR SP”設定為 “SURR Y”時出現此設定。 b)當進行快速設定時 ( 第 34 頁 ),預設設定被 改變。 c)當在“SP SETUP”中將相應的揚聲器設定為 “Y”時出現此設定 ( 第 90 頁 )。 90CT a)當進行快速設定時 ( 第 34 頁 ),預設設定被 改變。 b)當在“SP SETUP”中將相應的揚聲器設定為 “Y”時出現此設定 ( 第 90 頁 )。 xCUSTOMIZE DUAL MONO (雙單聲道) MAIN SUB MAIN+SUB MAIN/SUB 詳細說明,請參見第 76 頁上 的“欣賞多路廣播聲音 ( 雙 單聲道)”。 SB MATRIX SB AUTO SB OFF 詳細說明,請參見第 62 頁上 的“選擇後環繞解碼模式”。 DIMMER (調光) DIM OFF DIM ON 詳細說明,請參見第 80 頁上 的 “更改前面板顯示幕的亮 度”。 * 當您在 “SP SETUP”中將“SURR SP”設定 為 “SURR Y”,“SURR B SP”設定為 “SURR B Y”時將出現此設定。 (設定) 在設定顯示中選擇 [ 設定 ]。 詳細說明,請參見 “使用設定顯示” ( 第 81 頁 )。 x 快速 通常,重新設定系統或首次打開系統時,電 視機螢幕上會出現指南資訊,您可以進行快 速設定。如果您取消了快速設定但想再次進 行快速設定,請在此螢幕上進行操作。 請參見第34頁上的“使用快速設定的方法” 。 設定和調整 SB DEC* (後環繞揚聲 器解碼) 快速 設 定和 重新 設 定系 統 注意 進行快速設定後,以下項目的設定被改變。 – [ 語言設定 ] 中的 [ 畫面顯示語言 ]、[DVD 菜單 ] 和 [ 字幕語言 ] – [ 揚聲器設定 ] 中的 [ 視聽距離 ] 和 [ 音量調整 ] – [ 畫面設定 ] 中的 [ 電視機形式 ] x 重新設定 您可以重新設定系統。 在選擇 [ 重新設定 ] 和按 ENTER 鍵後,選擇 [ 是 ] 重新設定該設定 (要花幾秒鐘才能完 成)。選擇 [ 不 ] 並按 ENTER 鍵即可取消。重 新設定系統時,請勿按 "/1 鍵。 注意 • 當您選擇 [ 重新設定 ] 時,所有設定恢復到預設。 • 重新設定後打開系統時,電視機螢幕上會出現指 南資訊。若要進行快速設定 ( 第 34 頁 ),按 ENTER 鍵,若要返回正常螢幕,按 CLEAR 鍵。 91CT 附加資訊 故障排除 在使用此系統時,如遇到以下任何疑難問題, 在要求維修前先使用故障排除指南幫助解決 故障。如果無法解決問題,請就近與 Sony 經 銷商聯絡。 電源 無法打開電源。 • 檢查交流電源線是否連接牢固。 如果 STANDBY 指示燈閃爍。 立刻拔掉電源線插頭,然後檢查以下項目。 • 揚聲器 + 和 - 是否短路? • 是否使用規定的揚聲器? • 系統頂部的通風孔是否被東西阻塞? • 超低音揚聲器是否連接錯誤? 檢查上述項目並解決所有問題後,重新連接電源 線並打開系統電源。如果指示燈仍然閃爍,或者 在檢查上述所有項目後仍無法找到問題的原因, 請聯絡附近的 Sony 經銷商。 POWER/ON LINE 指示燈不亮。 • 揚聲器電纜的 + 和 - 短路。在這種情況下, 請從牆壁插座上斷開環繞聲放大器的交流電 源線,重新連接,然後再次打開環繞聲放大器。 影像 無影像。 • 視頻連接線未連接牢固。 • 視頻連接線損壞。 • 系統未連接至正確的電視機輸入插孔 ( 第 25 頁 )。 • 電視機尚未設定視頻輸入,以致無法觀看來自 系統的影像。 • 您將 [ 畫面設定 ] 中的 [分量視頻輸出 ] 設定為 [ 逐行 ],而您的電視機無法接收逐行格式訊 號。這時,請將設定復原至隔行格式(第27頁)。 • 即使您的電視機能與逐行格式(480p)訊號相 容,當您將 [ 分量視頻輸出 ] 設定為 [ 逐行 ] 時影像也有可能受影響。這時,請將 [ 分量視 頻輸出 ] 設定為 [ 隔行 ]( 第 83 頁 )。 • 當在 [ 畫面設定 ] 中選擇了 [ 逐行 ],則 MONITOR OUT 或 S VIDEO OUT 插孔中沒有訊號輸出。 92CT 出現影像干擾。 • 光碟髒或有裂紋。 • 如果您的系統影像輸出是通過您的錄影機到 達電視機,則某些 DVD 節目的防拷貝訊號會影 響影像品質。如果您將系統直接連接到電視機 後仍然遇到問題,請試著將您的系統連接到電 視機的 S 視頻輸入 ( 第 25 頁 )。 即使您在 [ 畫面設定 ] 的 [ 電視機形式 ] 中設定了 縱橫比,影像仍然無法充滿螢幕。 • 光碟上的縱橫比是固定的。 影像呈黑白。 • 視電視機而定,當播放以 NTSC 彩色制式錄製的 光碟時螢幕上的影像可能會變成黑白。 聲音 無聲音。 • 揚聲器導線未連接牢固。 • 如果前面板顯示幕中顯示 “MUTING ON”,則 按遙控器上的 MUTING 鍵。 • 系統處於暫停或慢動作播放模式。按 H 鍵返 回正常播放模式。 • 正在執行快進或快倒。按 H 鍵返回正常播放 模式。 • 檢查揚聲器設定 (第 36、86 頁)。 左右聲音不平衡或顛倒。 • 檢查揚聲器和部件是否連接正確和牢固。 • 在[平衡調整]菜單中調節平衡參數(第88頁)。 超低音揚聲器沒有聲音。 • 檢查揚聲器連接和設定 (第 36、86 頁)。 • 將聲場設定至 “AUTO FORMAT DIRECT AUTO” (第 58 頁)。 聽到劇烈的交流聲或噪音。 • 檢查揚聲器和部件是否連接牢固。 • 檢查連接線是否遠離變壓器或馬達,並且至少 遠離電視機或螢光燈 3 m。 • 將電視機遠離音頻裝置。 • 插頭和插孔髒了。用稍沾酒精的布進行擦拭。 • 清潔光碟。 在播放VIDEO CD、CD或MP3時聲音失去立體聲效果。 • 在控制菜單顯示中將 [ 聲音 ] 設置為 [STEREO]( 第 56 頁 )。 • 確保系統連接正確。 當您播放 Dolby Digital、DTS 或 MPEG 音頻音軌 時,難以聽到環繞效果。 • 確保聲場功能開啟 ( 第 58 頁 )。 • 檢查揚聲器連接和設定 (第 36、86 頁)。 • 視 DVD 而定,輸出訊號可能不是完全 5.1 聲道。 即使聲音軌跡是以 Dolby Digital 或 MPEG 音 頻格式錄製,但也可能是單聲道或立體聲。 聲音僅從中置揚聲器傳出。 • 視光碟而定,聲音可能僅從中置揚聲器傳出。 中置揚聲器中沒有聲音。 • 檢查揚聲器連接和設定。 • 確保聲場功能開啟 ( 第 58 頁 )。 • 視播放源而定,中置揚聲器效果可能不顯著。 操作 無法調入無線電電台。 • 檢查天線連接是否牢固。如果需要請調節天線 或連接外接天線。 • 電台的訊號強度太弱(當採用自動調諧進行調 台時)。使用直接調諧。 • 沒有預設電台或預設的電台已被消除(當採用 掃描預設電台進行調台時)。預設電台 ( 第 76 頁 )。 • 按 DISPLAY 鍵,使顯示幕中出現頻率。 遙控器不起作用。 • 遙控器和系統之間有障礙物。 • 遙控器和系統之間距離太遠。 • 遙控器未對準系統上的遙控感應窗。 • 遙控器電池電力不足。 POWER/ON LINE 指示燈短暫變成紅色。 • 當播放 MP3 或 DVD 光碟時,或者在更換光碟時, 指示燈會短暫變成紅色。這是正常情況。 POWER/ON LINE 指示燈紅色閃爍。 • 將本無線系統移到遠離附近其它無線系統的 地方。 • 將IR傳送器朝向環繞聲放大器的IR接收器(或 IR 接收器)放置。 無法播放 MP3 音頻軌跡。 • DATA CD 不是以符合 ISO 9660 Level 1/Level 2 或 Joliet 的 MP3 格式錄製的。 • MP3 音頻軌跡沒有 “.MP3”。 • 資料不是以 MP3 格式化,即使其副檔名為 “.MP3”。 • 系統只能播放 MP3(MPEG1 Audio Layer 3)音 頻。 • 在 [ 個人設定 ] 中將 [ 資料光碟優先 ] 設定為 [MP3]( 第 85 頁 )。 • 目錄層次超過 8。 • 光碟包含99個以上文件夾(一個文件夾中能含 有的 MP3 音頻軌跡的最大數量為 250)。 無法正確顯示 MP3 音頻文件夾或軌跡的標題。 • 系統只能顯示字母和數字。其他字元均顯示為 “ ”。 附加資訊 環繞揚聲器中沒有聲音或只有很低音量的聲音。 • 檢查揚聲器連接和設定。 • 確保聲場功能開啟 ( 第 58 頁 )。 • 選擇含有 “C. ST. EX”的聲場 ( 第 60 頁 )。 • 視播放源而定,環繞揚聲器效果可能不顯著。 • 環繞揚聲器的無線設定不正確 ( 第 29 頁 )。 • 等離子顯示屏可能會干擾傳輸,在此情況下, 請調整 IR 傳送器和環繞聲放大器的 IR 接收器 (或 IR 接收器)的位置 ( 第 29 頁 )。 • 切勿將環繞聲放大器(或 IR 接收器)安裝在受 陽光直射,或受諸如白光燈的強光照射的環境 中。 • 清潔IR傳送器和環繞聲放大器的IR接收器(或 IR 接收器)的表面。 無法播放光碟。 • 沒有插入光碟。 • 光碟顛倒。 請將光碟播放面朝下放入光碟托盤。 • 系統中的光碟歪斜。 • 系統無法播放 CD-ROM 等 ( 第 7 頁 )。 • DVD 上地區代碼與系統不匹配。 • 系統內部有濕氣凝結。取出光碟,讓系統電源 打開擱置約半個小時 ( 第 2 頁 )。 即使設定了用戶鎖定,對於 Super Audio CD 也未 出現輸入密碼顯示畫面。 • 對不同的 Super Audio CD 層設定了用戶鎖定。 無法播放 JPEG 影像檔案。 • DATA CD 不是以符合 ISO9660 Level 1/Level 2 或 Joliet 的 JPEG 格式錄製的。 • JPEG 影像檔案沒有擴展名 “.JPG”或 “.JPEG”。 • 資料不是以 JPEG 格式化,即使其擴展名為 “.JPG”或 “.JPEG”。 • 影像的長度或寬度超過 4720 點。 • 在 [ 個人設定 ] 中將 [ 資料光碟優先 ] 設定為 [JPEG]( 第 85 頁 )。 • 目錄層次超過 8。 • 您無法播放逐行 JPEG 檔案。 • 無法播放寬高比極大的 JPEG 影像檔案。 • 光碟包含99個以上文件夾(一個文件夾中能含 有的 JPEG 影像檔案的最大數量為 250)。 無法正確顯示 JPEG 文件夾或檔案的標題。 • 系統只能顯示字母和數字。其他字元均顯示為 “ ”。 續 93CT 光碟未從起始處開始播放。 • 已經選擇編序播放、隨機播放或重複播放 (第 45、47、48 頁)。 • 選擇了恢復播放。 在停止狀態下,按系統或遙控器上的 x 鍵,然 後開始播放 ( 第 39 頁 )。 • 電視機螢幕上自動出現標題、DVD 或 PBC 菜單。 系統自動開始播放光碟。 • 此 DVD 具有自動播放功能。 規格 放大器部分 立體聲模式 (額定) 環繞聲模式 (參考) 音樂電源輸出 播放自動停止。 • 有些光碟可能含有自動暫停訊號。當播放這類 光碟時,系統在自動暫停訊號處停止播放。 在 DVD 播放過程中系統關閉。 • 如果DVD播放暫停或在DVD播放過程中顯示DVD 頂部菜單或 DVD 菜單將近一小時,則系統將自 動關閉。 輸入 螢幕上的訊息未以您想要的語言出現。 • 在設定顯示中,在 [ 語言設定 ] 下的 [ 畫面顯示 語言 ] 中選擇想要的螢幕顯示語言 ( 第 82 頁 )。 輸出 無法改變字幕語言。 • 正在播放的 DVD 未錄製多語言字幕。 • 該 DVD 禁止改變字幕。 無法關閉字幕。 • 該 DVD 禁止關閉字幕。 無法改變角度。 • 正在播放的 DVD 未錄製多角度 ( 第 65 頁 )。 • 該 DVD 禁止改變角度。 光碟無法排出,並且前面板顯示幕中出現 “LOCKED”。 • 聯絡您的 Sony 經銷商或當地授權的 Sony 服務 機構。 “C”出現在前面板顯示幕上。 • 關閉電源,然後按系統上的[/1重新打開電源。 “COLOCK”出現在前面板顯示幕上。 • 關閉電源,然後按系統上的[/1重新打開電源, 然後執行關於移動本系統 ( 第 3 頁 )。如果前 面板顯示幕上仍然出現 “CANNOT LOCK”,聯 絡您的 SONY 經銷商或當地授權的 SONY 服務機 構。 系統工作不正常。 • 斷開電源插座和交流電源線的連接,幾分鐘後 再次連接。 94CT (帶 SS-TS20) 中置 *:100 W (帶 SS-CT44) 環繞 *:100 W + 100 W (帶 SS-TS23) 超低音 *: 100 W × 2 (帶 SS-WS12) * 視聲場設定和音源而定,揚聲器可能沒有聲音輸 出。 您無法操作某些功能,如停止、搜尋、慢動作播 放、重複播放、隨機播放或編序播放等。 • 視光碟而定,有可能無法進行上述某些操作。 參閱光碟附帶的使用說明書。 無法改變聲音軌跡語言。 • 正在播放的 DVD 上未錄製多語言軌跡。 • 該 DVD 禁止改變聲音軌跡語言。 65 W + 65 W (1kHz 時 4 歐姆,DIN) 前置: 100 W + 100 W VIDEO/SAT: 靈敏度:250mV/ 450 mV 阻抗:50 千歐姆 音頻 SURROUND BACK 電壓:2V 阻抗:1 千歐姆 接受低-和高-阻抗耳 機。 SuperudioCD/DVD系統 雷射 半導體雷射 (Super Audio CD/DVD: λ = 650 nm) (CD:λ = 780 nm) 輻射持續時間:連續 訊號格式系統 NTSC 或 NTSC/PAL 頻率響應 (在 2 CH STEREO 模式) DVD (PCM):2 Hz 至 22 kHz (±1.0 dB) 諧波失真 CD:2 Hz 至 20 kHz (±1.0 dB) 小於 0.03 % 調諧器部分 系統 調頻調諧器部分 調諧範圍 天線 天線端子 中頻 PLL 石英鎖定數位合成系 統 87.5 - 108.0 MHz (50 kHz 步級) 調頻導線式天線 75 歐姆,非平衡 10.7 MHz 調幅調諧器部分 調諧範圍 中東機型: 其它機型: 天線 中頻 超低音 531 - 1,602 kHz(間隔 設定為 9 kHz) 531 - 1,602 kHz(間隔 設定為 9 kHz) 530-1,710 kHz (間隔設 定為 10 kHz) 調幅環形天線 450 kHz 視頻部分 輸出 Video:1 Vp-p 75 歐姆 S video: Y:1 Vp-p 75 歐姆 C:0.286 Vp-p 75 歐姆 COMPONENT: Y:1 Vp-p 75 歐姆 PB/CB, PR/CR: 0.7 Vp-p 75 歐姆 低音反射 直徑 70 mm,圓錐形 4 歐姆 90 × 221 × 75 mm (寬 / 高 / 深) 0.7 kg 中置 揚聲器系統 揚聲器單元 額定阻抗 尺寸 (約) 質量 (約) 常規 系統 電源要求 台灣機型: 其他機型: 功率消耗 尺寸 (約) 質量 (約) 120 V AC,50/60 Hz 220-240 V AC,50/60 Hz 90 W 0.3 W (省電模式) 430 × 60 × 385 mm (寬 / 高 / 深)包括突出 部分 4.7 kg 低音反射 直徑 70 mm,圓錐形 4 歐姆 356 × 92 × 76 mm (寬 / 高 / 深) 0.9 kg 電源要求 台灣機型: 其他機型: 功率消耗 尺寸 (約) 質量 (約) 120 V AC,50/60 Hz 220-240 V AC,50/60 Hz 36 W 386 × 108 × 85 mm (寬 / 高 / 深)包括突出 部分 3.3 kg 提供的附件 請參見第 11 頁。 附加資訊 質量 (約) 質量 (約) 低音反射 直徑 160 mm,圓錐形 × 2 4 歐姆 201 × 368 × 448 mm (寬 / 高 / 深) 9.5 kg 環繞聲放大器 揚聲器 前置 揚聲器系統 揚聲器單元 額定阻抗 尺寸 (約) 揚聲器系統 揚聲器單元 額定阻抗 尺寸 (約) 設計和規格若有改變,恕不另行通知。 環繞 揚聲器系統 揚聲器單元 額定阻抗 尺寸 (約) 質量 (約) 低音反射 直徑 70 mm,圓錐形 4 歐姆 90 × 224 × 75 mm (寬 / 高 / 深) 0.73 kg 95CT 術語 標題 視頻軟體中 DVD、電影等最長的影像或音樂 部分,或音頻軟體中的整個文件夾。 播放控制 (PBC) VIDEO CD (2.0 版)上用來控制播放的編碼 訊號。 使用具有 PBC 功能的 VIDEO CD 上錄製的菜單 畫面,您可以體驗到簡單的交互式節目播放, 具有搜尋功能的編序等等。 場面 對於具有 PBC(播放控制)功能的 VIDEO CD, 菜單螢幕、移動影像和靜止影像分為多個部 分,稱為 “場面”。 檔案 包含 JPEG 影像檔案的資料 CD 中的影像部分。 地區代碼 本系統用於保護版權。地區代碼根據銷售區 域不同,位於每個 DVD 系統或 DVD 光碟上。 每個地區代碼指示在系統和光碟包裝上。系 統可以播放與其地區代碼相符合的光碟。系 統也可以播放帶 “ ALL ”標誌的光碟。即使 DVD 上無地區代碼,地區限制功能仍可啟動。 Dolby Digital 這種電影院聲音格式比 Dolby Surround Pro Logic 更先進。在這種格式中,環繞揚聲器 輸出具有擴展頻率範圍的立體聲音響,並且 單獨提供用於超低音的低音揚聲器聲道。這 種格式也稱為 “5.1”,這是因為低音揚聲器 聲道被指定為 0.1 聲道 (只有在需要超低音 效果時該聲道才起作用)。在此格式中的所 有六個聲道被單獨錄製,以實現良好的聲道 分離。此外,由於所有訊號均被數位化處理, 因此很少發生訊號衰減。 Dolby Digital EX 一種由 Dolby Laboratories 和 Lucasfilm THX 研發的 Dolby Digital 5.1 放大相容格 式,使用矩陣編碼,增加了另外的後環繞聲 道,且能用於 6.1 (三個環繞揚聲器)聲道 的播放。 Dolby Pro Logic II Dolby Pro Logic II 能從兩聲道音源創建出 五個全帶寬輸出聲道。這是採用先進的、高 純度矩陣環繞解碼器,不新增任何新的聲音 或音調著色獲得原始錄音的空間特性。 96CT x 電影模式 電影模式是用於立體聲電視顯示和所有以 Dolby Surround 編碼的節目。其結果是增強 了聲場的方向性,接近獨立 5.1 聲道的聲音 品質。 x 音樂模式 音樂模式是用於所有立體聲音樂錄音,並提 供寬闊和深層的聲音空間。 Dolby Surround Pro Logic 作為 Dolby Surround 解碼方式之一,Dolby Surround Pro Logic 可從兩個聲道聲音變為 四聲道。相比以前的 Dolby Surround 系統, Dolby Surround Pro Logic 能更自然地再現 從左至右的全景效果,並能更精確地定位聲 音。想要充分利用 Dolby Surround Pro Logic,您應該具備一對環繞揚聲器和一個 中置揚聲器。環繞揚聲器輸出單聲道聲音。 DTS 數位音頻壓縮技術為 Digital Theater Systems, Inc. 研發。該技術符合 5.1 聲道 環繞。此格式由後立體聲聲道和一個分離的 超低音聲道組成。DTS 提供相同的高品質數 位音頻 5.1 獨立聲道。因為所有的聲道資料 均獨立錄製並經數位處理,所以可實現良好 的聲道分離。 DTS-ES 一種 5.1 聲道放大相容格式,增加了另外的 後環繞聲道。有兩種格式:獨立處理後環繞 訊號的獨立 6.1,與環繞 (左 / 右)聲道共 同處理的矩陣 6.1。 DVD 雖然與普通 CD 直徑相同,但能包含最長 8 小 時動畫的光碟。 單層單面 DVD 的資料容量為 4.7 GB(千兆字 節),是 CD 的 7 倍。此外,雙層單面 DVD 的 資料容量為 8.5 GB,單層雙面 DVD 為 9.4 GB, 雙層雙面 DVD 為 17 GB。 影像資料採用數位壓縮技術的世界標準之一 MPEG 2 格式。影像資料被壓縮為原大小的 1/ 40 左右。DVD 也採用可變比特率技術,此技 術根據影像的狀態處理指定的資料。 音頻資料以 Dolby Digital 以及 PCM 被錄製, 能讓您欣賞到更真實的現場聲音。 另外,DVD 還具有各種先進功能,如多角度、 多語言和視聽者年齡控制等。 多角度功能 一些 DVD 上錄製了一個場面的各種角度、或 攝影機的各種視點。 多語種功能 一些 DVD 上為聲音或影像中的字幕錄製了幾 種語言。 的技術,進行無壓縮數位音頻訊號的紅外線 傳送,並將此技術引入了 DAV-SR4W。 此項技術在由 IEC (國際電子委員會)和 JEITA (日本電子和資訊技術工業協會)分 配的副載波頻段內部,使用無壓縮傳送數位 音頻訊號,進行 hi-fi 音頻傳送應用。(參 見圖 1) 隔行格式 (隔行掃描) 隔行格式是以每秒鐘 30 幀顯示電視影像的 NTSC 標準方式。每幀掃描兩次-以每秒鐘 60 次在偶數掃描線和奇數掃描線之間交替。 類比傳送 數位傳送(數位紅外線音頻傳送) 軌跡 Super Audio CD、CD、VIDEO CD 或 MP3 中的 一段影像或音樂。一個文件夾由幾個軌跡組 成 (僅適用 MP3)。 L R 2 DVD 可以分為基於電影或基於視頻的軟體。基 於電影的 DVD 包括的影像同在電影院觀看到 的相同 (每秒 24 幀)。基於視頻的 DVD,如 電視劇或連續劇,以每秒 30 幀(或 60 半幀) 顯示影像。 圖 1 數位紅外線音頻傳送訊號頻譜 Neo:6 由 Digital Theater Systems,Inc. 研發,將 傳統的 2 聲道或 Dolby Digital 聲源訊號經 由高精度數位矩陣解碼器,而獲得 6.1 聲道 的環繞播放。 電影院模式允許更多聲道分離以增強 6.1 聲 道效果,最適合用來播放電影。 音樂模式外加了能增添特殊音質的環繞分 量,使前左和右聲道未經加工就能獲得最佳 立體聲效果。 視聽者年齡控制 根據各國的限制水平,通過使用者的年齡來 限制光碟播放的一種 DVD 功能。各光碟的限 制各不相同;當啟動此功能時,播放被完全 禁止,或者暴力場面被跳過或被其他場面所 替代等等。 數位電影院音響 (DCS) 這是由 Sony研發的數位訊號處理技術所產生 的環繞聲的總署名。不同於以往主要針對再 現音樂的環繞聲場,數位電影院音響是專為 欣賞電影而設計。 數位紅外線音頻傳輸 近期,DVD、數位電視廣播衛星接收機和其他 高品質媒介正在快速普及。為了確保由這些 高品質 媒介 引 起 的細 微 差 別 無 消 耗 傳 送, Sony 研發了被稱為 “數位紅外線音頻傳送” 3 4 5 6 [MHz] 索引(Super Audio CD、CD)/ 視頻索引(VIDEO CD) VIDEO CD、Super Audio CD 或 CD 上將一個 軌跡分為多個部分的一個數字,以便於找到 您想要的點。視光碟而定,可能未錄製索引。 附加資訊 基於電影的軟體,基於視頻的軟體 Super Audio CD 通過使用 DSD(直流數位)技術,Super Audio CD 光碟能再現非常忠於原音的聲音。此技術 利用 2.8224MHz 的抽樣頻率 (是傳統 CD 的 64 倍)以及 1 比特量化,此量化使光碟能保 存標準 PCM 格式 CD 4 倍的資訊量。Super Audio CD 分為以下幾種類型。 • Super Audio CD (單層光碟) 此光碟含有一個單 HD 層 *。 * 用於 Super Audio CD 的高密度單層 HD (高密度)層 • Super Audio CD (雙層光碟) 此光碟含有雙 HD 層,能夠長時間連續播放。 並且,由於雙層光碟僅在一面含有雙 HD 層, 播放時您不必將光碟翻面。 HD 層 HD 層 續 97CT • Super Audio CD + CD (混合光碟) 此光碟含一個 HD 層和一個 CD 層。並且,由 於雙層都只在一面,播放時您不必將光碟翻 面。您可以使用傳統 CD 播放機播放此光碟 的 CD 層。 CD 層 HD 層 • 2 聲道+多聲道 Super Audio CD 此光碟含一個2聲道播放區域和一個多聲道 播放區域。 2 聲道播放區域 多聲道播放區域 VIDEO CD 含有動畫的光碟。 影像資料採用數位壓縮技術的世界標準之一 MPEG 1 格式。影像資料被壓縮為原大小的 1/ 140 左右。因此,一盤 12cm 的 VIDEO CD 最 多能容納 74 分鐘的動畫。 VIDEO CD 也含有壓縮音頻資料。超出人聽覺 範圍的聲音被壓縮,而能聽到的聲音未被壓 縮。VIDEO CD 能擁有常規音頻 CD 音頻信息 量的 6 倍。 有 2 種版本的 VIDEO CD。 • 1.1 版:您只能播放動畫和聲音。 • 2.0版:您可以播放高解析度靜像和欣賞PBC 功能。 本系統符合上述兩種版本。 文件夾 包含 MP3 音頻軌跡或 JPEG 檔案的資料 CD 上 的一段音樂或影像。 章 DVD 中一個標題的一部分。一個標題由幾個 章組成。 逐行格式 (順序掃描) 和隔行格式對比,逐行格式通過再現全部掃 描線 (NTSC 系統為 525 線),每秒鐘能再現 60 幀。逐行格式提高了整個畫面的品質,且 使靜像、文字和水平線的顯示更為清晰。本 格式與 525 逐行格式相容。 98CT 部件和控制器索引 詳細資訊,請參閱括號內所指示的頁。 前面板 F VOLUME (音量)+/- (37,88) B 光碟插槽 (37) G ./> (38,40) C (遙控感應器)(11) 附加資訊 A [/1 (電源)開關 /STANDBY 指示燈 (37) H x (停止)(38) D 前面板顯示幕 (100) I E PHONES(耳機)(系統的側面)插孔(37) J FUNCTION (功能)(37,75,77) (播放 / 暫停)(37) K Z (排出)(37) 續 99CT 前面板顯示幕 播放 DVD 時 播放狀態 當前模式 當前聲音效果 當前章號 TITLE CHAP NIGHT DSGX REP 1 D EX PL DTS –ES 當前標題號 當前聲音 播放時間 播放 Super Audio CD、CD、VIDEO CD (無 PBC 功能)或 MP3 時 播放時間 播放狀態 當前模式 當前聲音效果 當前軌跡號 PGM SHUF REP 1 MP3 SA– CD MULTI PBC TRK NIGHT DSGX PL DTS –ES NEO:6 PBC 播放時點亮(僅適用 VIDEO CD) 當前聲音 (僅 適 用 CD、VIDEO CD 或 MP3) 當處在MULTI聲道播放區域時點亮 (僅適用 Super Audio CD) 收聽無線電時 單聲道 / 立體聲效果 TUNED ST 當前波段 100CT 預設號碼 聲音效果 MONO NIGHT 當前電台 DSGX kHz MHz 播放 JPEG 檔案時 播放狀態 當前檔案編號 JPEG 附加資訊 續 101CT 後面板 VIDEO SPEAKER FRONT R CENTER R FRONT L AUDIO IN Y PB/CB PR/CR L S VIDEO (DVD ONLY) OPTICAL DIGITAL IN AM FM 75 COAXIAL DIR-T1 SURROUND R BACK WOOFER WOOFER AUDIO IN SAT SAT VIDEO MONITOR OUT A SPEAKER (揚聲器)插孔 (17) F AM 端子 (23) B SURROUND BACK(後環繞揚聲器)插孔 (20) G FM 75Ω COAXIAL(調頻 75 歐姆 同軸)插 孔 (23) C VIDEO AUDIO IN (L/R)(視頻音頻輸入) (左/右) 插孔 (25) D COMPONENT VIDEO OUT(分量視頻輸出)插 孔 (25) E SAT OPTICAL DIGITAL IN (衛星光纖數位 輸入)插孔 (26) 102CT COMPOMEMT VIDEO OUT L H MONITOR OUT (VIDEO/S VIDEO)(監視器 輸出)(視頻/ S 視頻)插孔 (25) I SAT AUDIO IN (L/R)(衛星音頻輸入) (左/右)插孔 (25) J DIR-T1 插孔 (17) 遙控器 注意 本遙控器在黑暗中發光。但在發光之前,遙控器必 須在光線下暴露片刻。 A Z (排出) (37,38) B DISPLAY (顯示)(52,54,77) 附加資訊 打開蓋子。 C SLEEP (睡眠)(79) D ./>,PRESET(重新設定)-/+(38, 40,77,78) E H(播放)(37,38,39,40,44,45,47, 48,49) F DVD TOP MENU/ALBUM-(DVD 頂部菜單 / 文件 夾)(40,42,43) G C/X/x/c/ENTER(輸入)(34,40,40,42, 43,45,45,47,48,50,56,62,65,66, 67,69,76,76,78,80,81,89) H DVD DISPLAY (DVD 顯示)(42,43,47, 48,50,54,55,56,65,66,67) I AUTO FORMAT DIRECT (自動格式命令) (58,59) J DSGX(64) K DVD SETUP (DVD 設定)(34,69,81) L SUBTITLE (字幕)(66) M AUDIO (音頻)(56) N ANGLE (角度)(65) O 數字鍵(34,40,40,45,50,65,67,69, 72,74) P ENTER (輸入) Q TUNER MENU (調諧器菜單)(76,78) R TV [/1 (開 / 待機)(72) S "/1 (待機)(34,37,77) T SONY TV DIRECT(控制 Sony 電視機)(74) U TUNER/BAND(諧調器 / 波段)(76,77,78) V FUNCTION (功能)(34,37,75,77,78) W m/M/ / SLOW(慢),TUNING(調 諧)-/+ (44,49,76,77) X x (停止)(38,39,40,67,77) Y X (暫停)(38) Z MUTING (靜音)(38) wj DVD MENU/ALBUM+ (DVD 菜單 / 文件夾 +) (40,42,43) wk VOL (音量)+/- (38,77) wl O RETURN(返回)(34,40,42,43,45, 50,67,69,81) e; MODE (模式)(59,60) ea NIGHT MODE (夜晚模式)(64) es PLAY MODE (播放模式)(45,47) ed REPEAT (重複)(45,48) ef TV (電視機)(72,74) eg TV/VIDEO (電視 / 視頻)(72,74) eh TV CH (電視頻道)+/- (72,74) ej TV VOL (電視音量)+/- (72) ek AMP MENU (AMP 菜單)(62,76,80,89) el CLEAR (消除)(34,45,50) r; FM MODE (調頻模式)(77) 續 103CT 環繞聲放大器 前面板 後面板 SURROUND L SPEAKER SPEAKER SURROUND R POWER/ON LINE DIR-R2 A POWER 開關 (29) B POWER/ON LINE 指示燈 (29) C IR 接收器 (29) D SPEAKER SURROUND L 插孔 (14, 18) E DIR-R2 插孔 (30) F SPEAKER SURROUND R 插孔 (14, 18) 104CT 語言代碼一覽表 語言名稱的英文拼寫符合 ISO 639:1988 (E/F)標準。 語言 代碼 語言 代碼 語言 1027 1028 1032 1039 1044 1045 1051 1052 1053 1057 1059 1060 1061 1066 1067 1070 1079 1093 1097 1103 1105 1109 1130 1142 1144 1145 1149 1150 1151 1157 1165 1166 1171 1174 1181 1183 1186 1194 1196 1203 1209 1217 1226 1229 1233 1235 1239 Afar Abkhazian Afrikaans Amharic Arabic Assamese Aymara Azerbaijani Bashkir Byelorussian Bulgarian Bihari Bislama Bengali; Bangla Tibetan Breton Catalan Corsican Czech Welsh Danish German Bhutani Greek English Esperanto Spanish Estonian Basque Persian Finnish Fiji Faroese French Frisian Irish Scots Gaelic Galician Guarani Gujarati Hausa Hindi Croatian Hungarian Armenian Interlingua Interlingue 1245 1248 1253 1254 1257 1261 1269 1283 1287 1297 1298 1299 1300 1301 1305 1307 1311 1313 1326 1327 1332 1334 1345 1347 1349 1350 1352 1353 1356 1357 1358 1363 1365 1369 1376 1379 1393 1403 1408 1417 1428 1435 1436 1463 1481 1482 1483 Inupiak Indonesian Icelandic Italian Hebrew Japanese Yiddish Javanese Georgian Kazakh Greenlandic Cambodian Kannada Korean Kashmiri Kurdish Kirghiz Latin Lingala Laothian Lithuanian Latvian; Lettish Malagasy Maori Macedonian Malayalam Mongolian Moldavian Marathi Malay Maltese Burmese Nauru Nepali Dutch Norwegian Occitan (Afan) Oromo Oriya Punjabi Polish Pashto; Pushto Portuguese Quechua Rhaeto-Romance Kirundi Romanian 1489 1491 1495 1498 1501 1502 1503 1505 1506 1507 1508 1509 1511 1512 1513 1514 1515 1516 1517 1521 1525 1527 1528 1529 1531 1532 1534 1535 1538 1539 1540 1543 1557 1564 1572 1581 1587 1613 1632 1665 1684 1697 Russian Kinyarwanda Sanskrit Sindhi Sangho Serbo-Croatian Singhalese Slovak Slovenian Samoan Shona Somali Albanian Serbian Siswati Sesotho Sundanese Swedish Swahili Tamil Telugu Tajik Thai Tigrinya Turkmen Tagalog Setswana Tonga Turkish Tsonga Tatar Twi Ukrainian Urdu Uzbek Vietnamese Volap k Wolof Xhosa Yoruba Chinese Zulu 1703 未指定 附加資訊 代碼 105CT DVD 設定菜單列表 您可以使用 DVD 設定菜單設定下列項目。 項目顯示順序可能與實際顯示有差異。 語言設定 畫面設定 畫面顯示設定 (從顯示的語言列表中選 擇您想要的語言。) 電視機形式 * DVD 菜單 (從顯示的語言列表中選 擇您想要的語言。) 屏幕節能 背景畫面 聲音語言 (從顯示的語言列表中選 擇您想要的語言。) 字幕語言 (從顯示的語言列表中選 擇您想要的語言。) 分量視頻輸出 個人設定 彩色系統 * 視聽者年齡 控制 水平 標準 聲音軌 跡選擇 改變密碼 關 自動 音頻動態 範圍選擇 關 開 資料光碟 優先 MP3 JPEG JPEG 日期 月/日/年 年/月/日 日/月/年 年/日/月 自動 PAL NTSC 關 8. 7. NC17 6. R 5. 4. PG13 3. PG 2. 1. G 美國 其他 t *) 僅適用於亞洲、澳洲和沙島地阿拉伯機型。 106CT 16:9 4:3 信箱 形式 4:3 全景掃描 開 關 封套畫面 圖像 圖形 1 圖形 2 圖形 3 圖形 4 圖形 5 藍色 黑色 隔行 逐行 有 無 *) 視該國家的機型而定,預設設定會有不同。 揚聲器設定 尺寸 前置揚聲器 中置揚聲器 環繞聲 後環繞聲 超低音揚聲器 視聽距離 音量調整 前置揚聲器 中置揚聲器 環繞聲 後環繞聲 超低音揚聲器 平衡調整 測試 音調 前置揚聲器 關 開 無 有 有 1.0m 1.0m 1.0m 1.0m - 7.0m 7.0m* 7.0m* 7.0m* -6 dB + 6 dB -6 dB + 6 dB -6 dB + 6 dB -10 dB + 10 dB -6 dB + 6 dB 附加資訊 中置揚聲器 環繞聲 左 環繞聲 右 後環繞聲 有 有 無 後 側 無 左或右 6 級 * 視前置揚聲器設定不同,設定範圍會有 變化 ( 第 86 頁 )。 設定 快速 重新設定 是 不 107CT AMP 菜單列表 您可以使用遙控器上的 AMP MENU 鍵設定下列項目。 SP SETUP CENTER SP SURR SP CUSTOMIZE CENTER Y CENTER N SURR Y SURR N SURR B SP SURR B N SURR B Y F DIST CEN DIST SURR DIST 1.0m 1.0m 1.0m 1.0m SB DIST SP POS - 7.0m 7.0m* 7.0m* 7.0m* SP BEHIND SP SIDE * 視前置揚聲器設定不同,設定範圍會有 變化 ( 第 89 頁 )。 LEVEL TESTTONE 108CT F BALANCE T.TONE OFF T.TONE ON 向左或向右分 6 級 CEN LEVEL -6 dB - +6 dB SL LEVEL -6 dB - +6 dB SR LEVEL -6 dB - +6 dB SB LEVEL SW LEVEL -10 dB - +10 dB -6 dB - +6 dB AUDIO DRC DRC OFF DRC ON DUAL MONO SB DEC DIMMER MAIN SUB MAIN+SUB MAIN/SUB SB MATRIX SB AUTO SB OFF DIM OFF DIM ON 索引 數字 G Q 16:9 82 4:3 全景掃描 82 4:3 信箱形式 82 隔行 97 個人設定 84 軌跡 6, 42, 50, 97 故障排除 92 前面板 99 前面板顯示幕 100 A ANGLE 65 B 背景畫面 83 編序播放 45 標題 6, 50, 96 C D 檔案 6, 96 電池 11 電視機和視頻組件連接圖 25 電視機形式 82 DIMMER 80 地區代碼 7, 96 DISPLAY 52 Dolby Digital 96 Dolby Digital EX 96 Dolby Pro Logic II 96 Dolby Surround Pro Logic 96 DSGX 64 DTS 96 DTS-ES 96 多角度功能 65, 97 多語種功能 56, 97 DVD 96 DVD 菜單 82 F 後環繞解碼模式 62 後面板 102 畫面設定 82 畫面顯示語言 82 幻燈片放映 44 恢復播放 39 J JPEG 43 JPEG 日期 85 K 可用光碟 6 控制菜單 9 快進 49 快退 49 S VIDEO 25 掃描 49 設定顯示 81 聲場 58 聲音軌跡選擇 85 聲音語言 56, 82 時間搜尋 50 視聽距離 86 視聽者年齡控制 69, 84, 97 收聽無線電廣播 77 雙單聲道 76 SHUFFLE 47 數位電影院音響 97 SLEEP 79 隨機播放 47 索引 6, 51, 97 Super Audio CD 97 附加資訊 彩色系統 84 場面 6, 9, 96 操作光碟 8 測試音調 88 尺寸 86 重複 48 H S T L 天線連接 23 連續播放 CD/VIDEO CD/Super Audio CD/DVD/MP3 37 V M W 慢動作 49 MP3 41 MUTING 38 文件夾 6, 42, 50, 98 無線電廣播 77 無線系統 29 VIDEO CD 98 N Neo:6 97 NIGHT MODE 64 P PBC 播放 40, 96 平衡調整 88 PLAY MODE 45, 47 分量視頻輸出 83 續 109CT Y 揚聲器設定 86 揚聲器系統連接圖 12 遙控器 72, 103 螢幕節能 83 螢幕顯示 控制菜單顯示 9 音量調整 87 音頻動態範圍控制 85 用戶鎖定 67 預設電台 76 語言設定 82 Z 章 6, 51, 98 逐行 98 資料光碟優先 85 字幕語言 66, 82 110CT 附加資訊 111CT 112CT 附加資訊 113CT 遙控器快速參考 蓋子打開狀態。 注意 本裝置遙控器採用與其他 Sony DVD 產品共同的控制訊 號。 因而,視按鍵而定,其他 Sony DVD 產品也可能有反應。 A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T 排出光碟。 在前面板顯示幕中切換所顯示的項目。 將系統設定為在預設的時間關閉。 ./>:按此鍵進入下一章或軌跡,或退 回前一章或軌跡。 PRESET - / +:掃描所有預設電台。 播放光碟。 在電視機螢幕上顯示標題菜單。 MP3/JPEG:選擇文件夾。 選擇並執行項目或設定。 在電視機螢幕上顯示控制菜單顯示畫面,以 設定或調整項目。 選擇聲場。 低音得到有效增強。 在電視機螢幕上顯示設定顯示畫面,以設定 或調整項目。 改變字幕語言。 改變聲音。 當播放 DVD 時改變角度。 選擇設定項目。電視機:選擇頻道號碼。* 執行項目或設定。 按此鍵儲存預設電台。開啟命名功能。 打開和關閉電視機。 打開和關閉系統電源。 打開 SONY 電視機和本系統並改變電視機輸入 源。 Sony Corporation Printed in Korea U 選擇調幅或調頻波段。 V 選擇您想要使用的部件。 W m/M (SCAN):在播放光碟時監視影像 找到某一點。 / SLOW:在暫停模式中以慢動作播放光 碟。 TUNING - / +:掃描所有有效的無線電電 台。 X 停止播放光碟。 Y 暫停播放光碟。 Z 靜音。 wj 在電視機螢幕上顯示 DVD 菜單。 MP3/JPEG:選擇文件夾。 wk 調節系統音量。 wl 按此鍵返回先前選擇的畫面等等。 e; 選擇聲場。 ea 低音量時使聲音清晰。 es 選擇編序或隨機播放模式。 ed 顯示重複狀態。 ef 將遙控器設定至電視機模式。 正常模式:關閉。 電視機模式:呈紅色。 eg 改變電視機的輸入模式。 eh 選擇電視頻道。 ej 調節電視機音量。 ek 設定揚聲器參數和分兩級改變前面板顯示幕 的亮度。 el 按此鍵取消已編序軌跡等。 r; 切換調頻立體聲接收的單聲道或立體聲收 聽。 * 視電視機製造而定,以下方法也可以使用。按 >10,然 後按數字。(例如,對於 25 頻道,按 >10,然後按 2 和 5。)
advertisement
* Your assessment is very important for improving the workof artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project
advertisement